US20230321198A1 - Dosage Regimen for a Controlled-Release PTH Compound - Google Patents

Dosage Regimen for a Controlled-Release PTH Compound Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20230321198A1
US20230321198A1 US18/176,372 US202318176372A US2023321198A1 US 20230321198 A1 US20230321198 A1 US 20230321198A1 US 202318176372 A US202318176372 A US 202318176372A US 2023321198 A1 US2023321198 A1 US 2023321198A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
pth
seq
moiety
formula
poly
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US18/176,372
Inventor
Kennett Sprogøe
Felix Cleemann
Guillaume Maitro
Mathias Krusch
Thomas Wegge
Joachim Zettler
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases AS
Original Assignee
Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases AS
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases AS filed Critical Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases AS
Priority to US18/176,372 priority Critical patent/US20230321198A1/en
Publication of US20230321198A1 publication Critical patent/US20230321198A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/22—Hormones
    • A61K38/29—Parathyroid hormone (parathormone); Parathyroid hormone-related peptides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/545—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/56—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule
    • A61K47/59—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes
    • A61K47/60—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes the organic macromolecular compound being a polyoxyalkylene oligomer, polymer or dendrimer, e.g. PEG, PPG, PEO or polyglycerol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/0012—Galenical forms characterised by the site of application
    • A61K9/0019—Injectable compositions; Intramuscular, intravenous, arterial, subcutaneous administration; Compositions to be administered through the skin in an invasive manner
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/14—Particulate form, e.g. powders, Processes for size reducing of pure drugs or the resulting products, Pure drug nanoparticles
    • A61K9/16—Agglomerates; Granulates; Microbeadlets ; Microspheres; Pellets; Solid products obtained by spray drying, spray freeze drying, spray congealing,(multiple) emulsion solvent evaporation or extraction
    • A61K9/1605—Excipients; Inactive ingredients
    • A61K9/1629—Organic macromolecular compounds
    • A61K9/1641—Organic macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyethylene glycol, poloxamers
    • A61K9/1647—Polyesters, e.g. poly(lactide-co-glycolide)
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/14—Drugs for dermatological disorders for baldness or alopecia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/18—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the parathyroid hormones
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/04—Antihaemorrhagics; Procoagulants; Haemostatic agents; Antifibrinolytic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/30—Macromolecular organic or inorganic compounds, e.g. inorganic polyphosphates
    • A61K47/34—Macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyesters, polyamino acids, polysiloxanes, polyphosphazines, copolymers of polyalkylene glycol or poloxamers

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof, for use in the treatment, control, delay or prevention of a condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH, wherein said pharmaceutical composition is administered no more frequent than once every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 administered every 24 hours required to maintain serum calcium within normal levels over said 24 hour period in humans and to methods of treating, controlling, delaying or preventing said conditions.
  • hypoparathyroidism is a rare endocrine disorder of calcium and phosphate metabolism that most often arises as a result of parathyroid gland damage or removal during surgery of the thyroid gland. Hypoparathyroidism is unusual among endocrine disorders in that it has not been treated, until recently, by replacement with the missing hormone, parathyroid hormone, or PTH.
  • Conventional therapy for hypoparathyroidism involves large doses of vitamin D and oral calcium supplementation, which, although often effective, is associated with marked swings in blood Ca 2+ resulting in hypercalcemia and hypocalcemia, excess urinary calcium excretion, nephrocalcinosis and ectopic calcifications, including vascular, basal ganglia, and lens of eye.
  • Calcium is the most abundant mineral in the human body, and its tight regulation is required for many critical biological functions, such as bone mineralization, muscle contraction, nerve conduction, hormone release, and blood coagulation. It is particularly important to maintain calcium concentration as stable as possible, because of the high sensitivity of a variety of cell systems or organs, including the central nervous system, muscle, and exo/endocrine glands, to small variations in Ca 2+ .
  • PTH is a major regulator of calcium homeostasis.
  • hypoparathyroidism The inappropriately low PTH level in relation to serum Ca 2
  • hypocalcemia the main biochemical abnormalities of hypoparathyroidism.
  • Clinical features of the disease include symptoms of hypocalcemia, such as perioral numbness, paresthesias, and carpal/pedal muscle spasms. Laryngeal spasm, tetany, and seizures are serious and potentially life-threatening complications.
  • Hyperphosphatemia and an elevated calcium ⁇ phosphate product contributes to ectopic deposition of insoluble calcium phosphate complexes in soft tissues, including vasculature, brain, kidneys, and other organs.
  • Standard therapy of hypoparathyroidism is oral calcium and vitamin D supplementation.
  • the goals of therapy are to a) ameliorate symptoms of hypocalcemia; b) maintain fasting scrum calcium within or slightly below to the low-normal range; c) maintain fasting serum phosphorus within the high normal range or only slightly elevated; d) avoid or minimize hypercalciuria; e) maintain a calcium-phosphate product at levels well below the upper limit of normal and f) avoid ectopic calcification of the kidney (stones and nephrocalcinosis) and other soft tissues.
  • Natpara, PTH(1-84) was approved for once-daily subcutaneous injection as an adjunct to vitamin D and calcium in patients with hypoparathyroidism.
  • Natpara, PTH(1-84) was approved to control hypocalcemia based on a pivotal trial demonstrating that 42 percent of PTH(1-84) treated participants achieved normal blood calcium levels on reduced doses of calcium supplements and active forms of vitamin D, compared to 3 percent of placebo-treated participants.
  • 71 percent of patients treated with PTH(1-84) developed hypercalcemia at one or more measurements during a 24-hour period.
  • PTH(1-84) reduced urinary calcium excretion 2-8 hours after injection but over the 24-hour period, urinary calcium excretion did not change.
  • urinary phosphate excretion increased only during the first 8 hours after PTH(1-84) injection.
  • PTH(1-34) or teriparatide, was approved by the FDA in 2002 for the treatment of osteoporosis. Despite not being approved for this indication, PTH(1-34) has historically been used for treatment of hypoparathyroidism with patients receiving twice- or thrice-daily injections. To facilitate more physiological PTH levels, clinical studies have been conducted with PTH(1-34) administered by pump delivery in comparison with twice-daily injections. Over 6-months, pump delivery produced normal, steady state calcium levels with minimal fluctuation and avoided the rise in serum and urine calcium levels that are evident soon after PTH injection.
  • PTH(1-34) The marked reduction in urinary calcium excretion when PTH(1-34) is administered by pump may indicate that PTH must be continuously exposed to the renal tubule for the renal calcium-conserving effects to be realized.
  • Pump delivery of PTH(1-34) achieved simultaneous normalization of markers of bone turnover, serum calcium, and urine calcium excretion. These results were achieved with a 65 percent lower daily PTH(1-34) dose and a reduced need for magnesium supplementation compared with the twice daily PTH(1-34) injection regimen.
  • Bone mineral density (BMD) by dual X-ray absorptometry (DXA) was consistent with known site-specific effects of PTH, namely increases in lumbar spine and declines in the distal 1 ⁇ 3 radius. The decrease observed at the distal 1 ⁇ 3 radius is consistent with the known effects of intermittent PTH to increase cortical porosity and endosteal resorption.
  • intermittent means with daily intervals, or more preferred with weekly intervals.
  • intermittent PTH replacement therapy that provides for an infusion-like profile of PTH, resulting in improved symptom control with a lower administered dose.
  • intermittent means with daily intervals, or more preferred or alternatively with weekly intervals.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof, for use in the treatment, control, delay or prevention of a condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH, wherein said pharmaceutical composition is administered no more frequent than once every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 administered every 24 hours required to maintain serum calcium within normal levels over said 24 hour period in humans.
  • PTH 1-84 is the polypeptide with the sequence of SEQ ID NO:1.
  • no more frequent than once every 24 hours” and “at least once every 24 hours” are used synonymously and mean that the time between two consecutive administrations is 24 hours or longer, meaning that there may for example be 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 120 hours, 144 hours or one week between two consecutive administrations.
  • the terms “within normal level” and “within the normal range” with regard to serum calcium levels refer to the calcium level ordinarily found in a subject of a given species, sex and age, provided as the range given by the lower limit of normal and the upper limit of normal.
  • the normal level preferably corresponds to a serum calcium level of above 8.5 mg/dL (albumin-adjusted).
  • the upper limit of normal is below 10.5 mg/dL
  • serum calcium above 8.5 mg/dL refers to albumin-adjusted calcium concentrations.
  • albumin-adjusted with regard to calcium levels means that the measured serum calcium level is corrected for calcium bound to albumin according to the following formula:
  • non-adjusted with regard to calcium levels means that the measured total calcium concentration (mg/dL) is not adjusted for albumin-binding of calcium.
  • the term “molar equivalent dose” refers to the dose in which the controlled-release PTH compound comprises the same number of PTH molecules or PTH molecules as a particular dose of PTH 1-84 comprises PTH 1-84 molecules. For example, if a controlled-release PTH compound comprises one PTH molecule or PTH moiety per controlled-release PTH compound the molar equivalent dose is 1 controlled-release PTH compound for every 1 molecule of PTH 1-84. If a controlled-release PTH compound comprises two PTH molecules or PTH moieties per controlled-release PTH compound the molar equivalent dose is 1 controlled-release PTH compound for every 2 molecules of PTH 1-84.
  • controlled-release PTH compound refers to any compound, conjugate, crystal or admixture that comprises at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety and from which the at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety is released with a release half-life of at least 12 hours.
  • release half-life and “half-life” refer to the time required under physiological conditions (i.e. aqueous buffer, pH 7.4, 37° C.) until half of all PTH or PTH moieties, respectively, comprised in a controlled-release PTH compound are released from said controlled-release PTH compound.
  • PTH refers all PTH polypeptides, preferably from mammalian species, more preferably from human and mammalian species, more preferably from human and murine species, as well as their variants, analogs, orthologs, homologs, and derivatives and fragments thereof, that are characterized by raising serum calcium and renal phosphorus excretion, and lowering serum phosphorus and renal calcium excretion.
  • PTH also refers to all PTH-related polypeptides (PTHrP), such as the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:121, that bind to and activate the common PTH/PTHrP1 receptor.
  • PTH refers to the PTH polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51 as well as its variants, homologs and derivatives exhibiting essentially the same biological activity, i.e. raising serum calcium and renal phosphorus excretion, and lowering serum phosphorus and renal calcium excretion.
  • PTH refers to the following polypeptide sequences:
  • the term “PTH” refers to the sequence of SEQ ID:NOs 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114 and 115. Even more preferably, the term “PTH” refers to the sequence of SEQ ID:NOs 50, 51, 52, 110, 111 and 112. In a particularly preferred embodiment the term “PTH” refers to the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • PTH polypeptide variant refers to a polypeptide from the same species that differs from a reference PTH or PTHrP polypeptide.
  • a reference is a PTH polypeptide sequence and has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • differences are limited so that the amino acid sequence of the reference and the variant are closely similar overall and, in many regions, identical.
  • PTH polypeptide variants are at least 70%, 80%, 90%, or 95% identical to a reference PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, preferably to the PTH polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • polypeptide having an amino acid sequence at least, for example, 95% “identical” to a query amino acid sequence it is intended that the amino acid sequence of the subject polypeptide is identical to the query sequence except that the subject polypeptide sequence may include up to five amino acid alterations per each 100 amino acids of the query amino acid sequence. These alterations of the reference sequence may occur at the amino (N-terminal) or carboxy terminal (C-terminal) positions of the reference amino acid sequence or anywhere between those terminal positions, interspersed either individually among residues in the reference sequence or in one or more contiguous groups within the reference sequence.
  • the query sequence may be an entire amino acid sequence of the reference sequence or any fragment specified as described herein.
  • the query sequence is the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • PTH polypeptide variants may be naturally occurring variants, such as naturally occurring allelic variants encoded by one of several alternate forms of a PTH or PTHrP occupying a given locus on a chromosome or an organism, or isoforms encoded by naturally occurring splice variants originating from a single primary transcript.
  • a PTH polypeptide variant may be a variant that is not known to occur naturally and that can be made by mutagenesis techniques known in the art.
  • N-terminus or C-terminus of a bioactive polypeptide may be deleted from the N-terminus or C-terminus of a bioactive polypeptide without substantial loss of biological function.
  • Such N- and/or C-terminal deletions are also encompassed by the term PTH polypeptide variant.
  • PTH polypeptide also encompasses all PTH and PTHrP polypeptides encoded by PTH and PTHrP analogs, orthologs, and/or species homologs. It is also recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art that PTHrP and PTHrP analogs bind to activate the common PTH/PTHrP1 receptor, so the term PTH polypeptide also encompasses all PTHrP analogs.
  • PTH analog refers to PTH and PTHrP of different and unrelated organisms which perform the same functions in each organism but which did not originate from an ancestral structure that the organisms' ancestors had in common.
  • analogous PTH and PTHrP arose separately and then later evolved to perform the same or similar functions.
  • analogous PTH and PTHrP polypeptides are polypeptides with quite different amino acid sequences but that perform the same biological activity, namely raising serum calcium and renal phosphorus excretion, and lowering serum phosphorus and renal calcium excretion.
  • PTH ortholog refers to PTH and PTHrP within two different species which sequences are related to each other via a common homologous PTH or PTHrP in an ancestral species, but which have evolved to become different from each other.
  • PTH homolog refers to PTH and PTHrP of different organisms which perform the same functions in each organism and which originate from an ancestral structure that the organisms' ancestors had in common.
  • homologous PTH polypeptides are polypeptides with quite similar amino acid sequences that perform the same biological activity, namely raising serum calcium and renal phosphorus excretion, and lowering serum phosphorus and renal calcium excretion.
  • PTH polypeptide homologs may be defined as polypeptides exhibiting at least 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% or 95% identity to a reference PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, preferably the PTH polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • a PTH polypeptide according to the invention may be, for example: (i) one in which at least one of the amino acids residues is substituted with a conserved or non-conserved amino acid residue, preferably a conserved amino acid residue, and such substituted amino acid residue may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code; and/or (ii) one in which at least one of the amino acid residues includes a substituent group; and/or (iii) one in which the PTH polypeptide is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol); and/or (iv) one in which additional amino acids are fused to the PTH polypeptide, such as an IgG Fc fusion region polypeptide or leader or secretory sequence or a sequence which is employed for purification of the above form of the polypeptide or a pre-protein sequence.
  • PTH polypeptide fragment refers to any polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of a part of the amino acid sequence of a PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, preferably the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • a PTH polypeptide fragment comprises at least 6, such as at least 8, at least 10 or at least 17 consecutive amino acids of a PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, more preferably of the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • a PTH polypeptide fragment may additionally be described as sub-genuses of PTH or PTHrP polypeptides comprising at least 6 amino acids, wherein “at least 6” is defined as any integer between 6 and the integer representing the C-terminal amino acid of a PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, preferably of the polypeptide of SEQ ID No:51.
  • PTH or PTHrP polypeptide fragments at least 6 amino acids in length, as described above, that are further specified in terms of their N-terminal and C-terminal positions.
  • PTH polypeptide fragment as individual species are all PTH or PTHrP polypeptide fragments, at least 6 amino acids in length, as described above, that may be particularly specified by a N-terminal and C-terminal position.
  • PTH also includes poly(amino acid) conjugates which have a sequence as described above, but having a backbone that comprises both amide and non-amide linkages, such as ester linkages, like for example depsipeptides.
  • Depsipeptides are chains of amino acid residues in which the backbone comprises both amide (peptide) and ester bonds.
  • side chain refers either to the moiety attached to the alpha-carbon of an amino acid moiety, if the amino acid moiety is connected through amine bonds such as in polypeptides, or to any carbon atom-comprising moiety attached to the backbone of a poly(amino acid) conjugate, such as for example in the case of depsipeptides.
  • PTH refers to polypeptides having a backbone formed through amide (peptide) bonds.
  • PTH includes the above-described variants, analogs, orthologs, homologs, derivatives and fragments of PTH and PTHrP, all references to specific positions within a reference sequence also include the equivalent positions in variants, analogs, orthologs, homologs, derivatives and fragments of a PTH or PTHrP moiety, even if not specifically mentioned.
  • micelle means an aggregate of amphiphilic molecules dispersed in a liquid colloid. In aqueous solution a typical micelle forms an aggregate with the hydrophilic moiety of the surfactant molecules facing the surrounding solvent and the hydrophobic moiety of the surfactant molecule facing inwards, also called “normal-phase micelle”. “Invers micelles” have the hydrophilic moiety facing inwards and the hydrophobic moiety facing the surrounding solvent.
  • liposome refers to a vesicle, preferably a spherical vesicle, having at least one lipid bilayer.
  • liposomes comprise phospholipids, even more preferably phosphatidylcholine.
  • liposome refers to various structures and sizes, such as, for example, to multilamellar liposome vesicles (MLV) having more than one concentric lipid bilayer with an average diameter of 100 to 1000 nm, small unilamellar liposome vesicles (SUV) having one lipid bilayer and an average diameter of 25 to 100 nm, large unilamellar liposome vesicles (LUV) having one lipid bilayer and an average diameter of about 1000 ⁇ m and giant unilamellar vesicles (GUV) having one lipid bilayer and an average diameter of 1 to 100 ⁇ m.
  • LUV large unilamellar liposome vesicles
  • GUI giant unilamellar vesicles
  • the term “liposome” also includes elastic vesicles such as transfersomes and ethosomes, for example.
  • aquasome refers to spherical nanoparticles having a diameter of 60 to 300 nm that comprise at least three layers of self-assembled structure, namely a solid phase nanocrystalline core coated with an oligomeric film to which drug molecules are adsorbed with or without modification of the drug.
  • ethosome refers to lipid vesicles comprising phospholipids and ethanol and/or isopropanol in relatively high concentration and water, having a size ranging from tens of nanometers to micrometers.
  • LeciPlex refers to positively charged phospholipid-based vesicular system which comprises soy PC, a cationic agent, and a bio-compatible solvent like PEG 300, PEG 400, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol polyethylene glycol ether or 2-pyrrolidone or N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
  • nuclear refers to unilamellar or multilamellar vesicles comprising non-ionic surfactants.
  • pharmacosome refers to ultrafine vesicular, micellar or hexagonal aggregates from lipids covalently bound to biologically active moieties.
  • niosome refers to dry formulations of surfactant-coated carrier which on rehydration and mild agitation gives niosomes.
  • polymersome refers to an artificial spherical vesicle comprising a membrane formed from amphiphilic synthetic block copolymers and may optionally comprise an aqueous solution in its core.
  • a polymersome has a diameter ranging from 50 nm to 5 ⁇ m and larger.
  • syntosomes which are polymersomes engineered to comprise channels that allow certain chemicals to pass through the membrane into or out of the vesicle.
  • sphingosome refers to a concentric, bilayered vesicle in which an aqueous volume is entirely enclosed by a membranous lipid bilayer mainly composed of natural or synthetic sphingolipid.
  • transferosome refers to ultraflexible lipid vesicles comprising an aqueous core that are formed from a mixture of common polar and suitable edge-activated lipids which facilitate the formation of highly curved bilayers which render the transferosome highly deformable.
  • ufasome refers to a vesicle comprising unsaturated fatty acids.
  • polypeptide refers to a peptide comprising up to and including 50 amino acid monomers.
  • protein refers to a peptide of more than 50 amino acid residues.
  • a protein comprises at most 20000 amino acid residues, such as at most 15000 amino acid residues, such as at most 10000 amino acid residues, such as at most 5000 amino acid residues, such as at most 4000 amino acid residues, such as at most 3000 amino acid residues, such as at most 2000 amino acid residues, such as at most 1000 amino acid residues.
  • physiological conditions refers to an aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37° C.
  • the term “pharmaceutical composition” refers to a composition containing one or more active ingredients, such as for example at least one controlled-release PTH compounds, and one or more excipients, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination, complexation or aggregation of any two or more of the ingredients of the composition, or from dissociation of one or more of the ingredients, or from other types of reactions or interactions of one or more of the ingredients.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions for use of the present invention encompass any composition made by admixing one or more controlled-release PTH compound and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • liquid composition refers to a mixture comprising water-soluble controlled-release PTH compound and one or more solvents, such as water.
  • composition relates to a mixture comprising water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound and one or more solvents, such as water.
  • dry composition means that a pharmaceutical composition is provided in a dry form. Suitable methods for drying are spray-drying and lyophilization, i.e. freeze-drying. Such dry composition of prodrug has a residual water content of a maximum of 10%, preferably less than 5% and more preferably less than 2%, determined according to Karl Fischer.
  • the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is dried by lyophilization.
  • drug refers to a substance, such as PTH, used in the treatment, cure, prevention, or diagnosis of a disease or used to otherwise enhance physical or mental well-being. If a drug is conjugated to another moiety, the moiety of the resulting product that originated from the drug is referred to as “biologically active moiety”.
  • prodrug refers to a conjugate in which a biologically active moiety is reversibly and covalently connected to a specialized protective group through a reversible linker moiety, also referred to as “reversible prodrug linker moiety”, which comprises a reversible linkage with the biologically active moiety and wherein the specialized protective group alters or eliminates undesirable properties in the parent molecule. This also includes the enhancement of desirable properties in the drug and the suppression of undesirable properties.
  • a prodrug releases the reversibly and covalently bound biologically active moiety in the form of its corresponding drug.
  • a prodrug is a conjugate comprising a biologically active moiety which is covalently and reversibly conjugated to a carrier moiety via a reversible prodrug linker moiety, which covalent and reversible conjugation of the carrier to the reversible prodrug linker moiety is either directly or through a spacer.
  • Such conjugate releases the formerly conjugated biologically active moiety in the form of a free unmodified drug.
  • a “biodegradable linkage” or a “reversible linkage” is a linkage that is hydrolytically degradable, i.e. cleavable, in the absence of enzymes under physiological conditions (aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37° C.) with a half-life ranging from one hour to three months, preferably from one hour to two months, even more preferably from one hour to one month, even more preferably from one hour to three weeks, most preferably from one hour to two weeks.
  • a stable linkage is a linkage having a half-life under physiological conditions (aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37° C.) of more than three months.
  • traceless prodrug linker means a reversible prodrug linker, i.e. a linker moiety reversibly and covalently connecting the biologically active moiety with the carrier, which upon cleavage releases the drug in its free form.
  • free form of a drug means the drug in its unmodified, pharmacologically active form.
  • excipient refers to a diluent, adjuvant, or vehicle with which the therapeutic, such as a drug or prodrug, is administered.
  • Such pharmaceutical excipient can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, including but not limited to peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred excipient when the pharmaceutical composition is administered orally.
  • Saline and aqueous dextrose are preferred excipients when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions are preferably employed as liquid excipients for injectable solutions.
  • Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, trehalose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like.
  • the pharmaceutical composition can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, like, for example, acetate, succinate, tris, carbonate, phosphate, HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid), MES (2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid), or can contain detergents, like Tween, poloxamers, poloxamines, CHAPS, Igepal, or amino acids like, for example, glycine, lysine, or histidine.
  • pH buffering agents like, for example, acetate, succinate, tris, carbonate, phosphate, HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid), MES (2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid)
  • detergents like Tween, poloxamers, poloxamines, CHAPS, Igepal, or amino acids like, for example,
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and excipients such as triglycerides.
  • Oral formulation can include standard excipients such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc.
  • Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the drug or biologically active moiety, together with a suitable amount of excipient so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient.
  • the formulation should suit the mode of administration.
  • reagent means a chemical compound which comprises at least one functional group for reaction with the functional group of another chemical compound or drug. It is understood that a drug comprising a functional group (such as a primary or secondary amine or hydroxyl functional group) is also a reagent.
  • moiety means a part of a molecule, which lacks one or more atom(s) compared to the corresponding reagent. If, for example, a reagent of the formula “H—X—H” reacts with another reagent and becomes part of the reaction product, the corresponding moiety of the reaction product has the structure “H—X—” or “—X—”, whereas each “—” indicates attachment to another moiety. Accordingly, a biologically active moiety is released from a prodrug as a drug.
  • sequence or chemical structure of a group of atoms is provided which group of atoms is attached to two moieties or is interrupting a moiety, said sequence or chemical structure can be attached to the two moieties in either orientation, unless explicitly stated otherwise.
  • a moiety “—C(O)N(R 1 )—” can be attached to two moieties or interrupting a moiety either as “—C(O)N(R 1 )—” or as “—N(R 1 )C(O)—”.
  • a moiety “—C(O)N(R 1 )—” can be attached to two moieties or interrupting a moiety either as “—C(O)N(R 1 )—” or as “—N(R 1 )C(O)—”.
  • a moiety “—C(O)N(R 1 )—” can be attached to two moieties or interrupting a moiety either as “—C(O)N(R 1 )—” or as “—N(R 1
  • the term “functional group” means a group of atoms which can react with other groups of atoms.
  • Functional groups include but are not limited to the following groups: carboxylic acid (—(C ⁇ O)OH), primary or secondary amine (—NH 2 , —NH—), maleimide, thiol (—SH), sulfonic acid (—(O ⁇ S ⁇ O)OH), carbonate, carbamate (—O(C ⁇ O)N ⁇ ), hydroxyl (—OH), aldehyde (—(C ⁇ O)H), ketone (—(C ⁇ O)—), hydrazine (>N—N ⁇ ), isocyanate, isothiocyanate, phosphoric acid (—O(P ⁇ O)OHOH), phosphonic acid (—O(P ⁇ O)OHH), haloacetyl, alkyl halide, acryloyl, aryl fluoride, hydroxylamine, disulfide, sulfonamides, sulfuric acid, vinyl
  • the invention also comprises their corresponding pharmaceutically or toxicologically acceptable salts, in particular their pharmaceutically utilizable salts.
  • the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention comprising acidic groups can be used according to the invention, for example, as alkali metal salts, alkaline earth metal salts or as ammonium salts. More precise examples of such salts include sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts or salts with ammonia or organic amines such as, for example, ethylamine, ethanolamine, triethanolamine or amino acids.
  • Controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention comprising one or more basic groups, i.e.
  • acids which can be protonated, can be present and can be used according to the invention in the form of their addition salts with inorganic or organic acids.
  • suitable acids include hydrogen chloride, hydrogen bromide, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acids, oxalic acid, acetic acid, tartaric acid, lactic acid, salicylic acid, benzoic acid, formic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, diethylacetic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, pimelic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malic acid, sulfaminic acid, phenylpropionic acid, gluconic acid, ascorbic acid, isonicotinic acid, citric acid, adipic acid, and other acids known to the person skilled in the art.
  • the invention also includes, in addition to the salt forms mentioned, inner salts or betaines (zwitterions).
  • inner salts or betaines zwitterions
  • the respective salts can be obtained by customary methods which are known to the person skilled in the art like, for example by contacting these compounds with an organic or inorganic acid or base in a solvent or dispersant, or by anion exchange or cation exchange with other salts.
  • the present invention also includes all salts of the compounds for use of the present invention which, owing to low physiological compatibility, are not directly suitable for use in pharmaceuticals but which can be used, for example, as intermediates for chemical reactions or for the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable means a substance that does cause harm when administered to a patient and preferably means approved by a regulatory agency, such as the EMA (Europe) and/or the FDA (US) and/or any other national regulatory agency for use in animals, preferably for use in humans.
  • a regulatory agency such as the EMA (Europe) and/or the FDA (US) and/or any other national regulatory agency for use in animals, preferably for use in humans.
  • the term “about” in combination with a numerical value is used to indicate a range ranging from and including the numerical value plus and minus no more than 10% of said numerical value, more preferably no more than 8% of said numerical value, even more preferably no more than 5% of said numerical value and most preferably no more than 2% of said numerical value.
  • the phrase “about 200” is used to mean a range ranging from and including 200+/ ⁇ 10%, i.e. ranging from and including 180 to 220; preferably 200+/ ⁇ 8%, i.e. ranging from and including 184 to 216; even more preferably ranging from and including 200+/ ⁇ 5%, i.e.
  • polymer means a molecule comprising repeating structural units, i.e. the monomers, connected by chemical bonds in a linear, circular, branched, crosslinked or dendrimeric way or a combination thereof, which may be of synthetic or biological origin or a combination of both. It is understood that a polymer may also comprise one or more other chemical groups and/or moieties, such as, for example, one or more functional groups.
  • a soluble polymer has a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa, e.g.
  • the polymer is soluble, it preferable has a molecular weight of at most 1000 kDa, such as at most 750 kDa, such as at most 500 kDa, such as at most 300 kDa, such as at most 200 kDa, such as at most 100 kDa.
  • insoluble polymers such as hydrogels, no meaningful molecular weight ranges can be provided.
  • a protein is a polymer in which the amino acids are the repeating structural units, even though the side chains of each amino acid may be different.
  • polymeric means a reagent or a moiety comprising one or more polymers or polymer moieties.
  • a polymeric reagent or moiety may optionally also comprise one or more other moiety/moieties, which are preferably selected from the group consisting of:
  • the molecular weight ranges, molecular weights, ranges of numbers of monomers in a polymer and numbers of monomers in a polymer as used herein refer to the number average molecular weight and number average of monomers, i.e. to the arithmetic mean of the molecular weight of the polymer or polymeric moiety and the arithmetic mean of the number of monomers of the polymer or polymeric moiety.
  • any integer given for “x” therefore corresponds to the arithmetic mean number of monomers.
  • Any range of integers given for “x” provides the range of integers in which the arithmetic mean numbers of monomers lies.
  • An integer for “x” given as “about x” means that the arithmetic mean numbers of monomers lies in a range of integers of x+/ ⁇ 10%, preferably x+/ ⁇ 8%, more preferably x+/ ⁇ 5% and most preferably x+/ ⁇ 2%.
  • number average molecular weight means the ordinary arithmetic mean of the molecular weights of the individual polymers.
  • water-soluble with reference to a carrier means that when such carrier is part of the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention at least 1 g of the controlled-release PTH compound comprising such water-soluble carrier can be dissolved in one liter of water at 20° C. to form a homogeneous solution.
  • water-insoluble with reference to a carrier means that when such carrier is part of a controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention less than 1 g of the controlled-release PTH compound comprising such water-insoluble carrier can be dissolved in one liter of water at 20° C. to form a homogeneous solution.
  • water-soluble with reference to the controlled-release PTH compound means that at least 1 g of the controlled-release PTH compound can be dissolved in one liter of water at 20° C. to form a homogeneous solution. Accordingly, the term “water-insoluble” with reference to the controlled-release PTH compound means that less than 1 g of the controlled-release PTH compound can be dissolved in one liter of water at 20° C. to form a homogeneous solution.
  • hydrogel means a hydrophilic or amphiphilic polymeric network composed of homopolymers or copolymers, which is insoluble due to the presence of covalent chemical crosslinks.
  • the crosslinks provide the network structure and physical integrity.
  • thermogelling means a compound that is a liquid or a low viscosity solution having a viscosity of less than 500 cps at 25° C. at a shear rate of about 0.1/second at a low temperature, which low temperature ranges between about 0° C. to about 10° C., but which is a higher viscosity compound of less than 10000 cps at 25° C. at a shear rate of about 0.1/second at a higher temperature, which higher temperature ranges between about 30° C. to about 40° C., such as at about 37° C.
  • a PEG-based moiety or reagent in relation to a moiety or reagent means that said moiety or reagent comprises PEG.
  • a PEG-based moiety or reagent comprises at least 10% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 20% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 30% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 40% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 50% (w/w), such as at least 60 (w/w) PEG, such as at least 70% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 80% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 90% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 95%.
  • the remaining weight percentage of the PEG-based moiety or reagent are other moieties preferably selected from the following moieties and linkages:
  • PEG-based comprising at least X % PEG in relation to a moiety or reagent means that said moiety or reagent comprises at least X % (w/w) ethylene glycol units (—CH 2 CH 2 O—), wherein the ethylene glycol units may be arranged blockwise, alternating or may be randomly distributed within the moiety or reagent and preferably all ethylene glycol units of said moiety or reagent are present in one block; the remaining weight percentage of the PEG-based moiety or reagent are other moieties preferably selected from the following moieties and linkages:
  • the ten “hyaluronic acid-based comprising at least X % hyaluronic acid” is used accordingly.
  • substituted means that one or more —H atom(s) of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a different atom or a group of atoms, which are referred to as “substituent”.
  • the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —COOR x1 , —OR x1 , —C(O)R x1 , —C(O)N(R x1 R x1a ), —S(O) 2 N(R x1 R x1a ), —S(O)N(R x1 R x1a ), —S(O) 2 R x1 , —S(O)R x1 , —N(R x1 )S(O) 2 N(R x1a R x1b ), —SR x1 , —N(R x1 R x1a ), —NO 2 , —OC(O)R x1 , —N(R x1 )C(O)R x1a , —N(R x1 )S(O) 2 R x1
  • —R x1 , —R x1a , —R x1b are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, -T 0 , C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T 0 , C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —R x2 , which are the same or different and wherein C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T 0 -, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R x3 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R x3 )—, —S(O)N(R x3 )—; —S(
  • each T 0 is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T 0 is independently optionally substituted with one or more —R x2 which are the same or different;
  • each —R x2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, oxo ( ⁇ O), —COOR x4 , —OR x4 , —C(O)R x4 , —C(O)N(R x4 R x4a ), —S(O) 2 N(R x4 R x4 ), —S(O)N(R x4 R x4 ), —S(O) 2 R x4 , —S(O)R x4 , —N(R x4 )S(O) 2 N(R x4a R x4 ), —SR x4 , —N(R x4 R x4a ), —NO 2 , —OC(O)R x4 , —N(R x4 )C(O)R x4a , —N(R x4 )S(O) 2 R x4a ,
  • each —R x3 , —R x3a , —R x4 , —R x4a , —R x4b is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and C 1-6 alkyl; wherein C 1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —COOR x1 , —OR x1 , —C(O)R x1 , —C(O)N(R x1 R x1a ), —S(O) 2 N(R x1 R x1a ), —S(O)N(R x1 R x1a ), —S(O) 2 R x1 , —S(O)R x1 , —N(R x1 )S(O) 2 N(R x1a R x1b ), —SR x1 , —N(R x1 R x1a ), —NO 2 , —OC(O)R x1 , —N(R x1 )C(O)R x1a , —N(R x1 )S(O) 2 R x1
  • the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —COOR x1 , —OR x1 , —C(O)R x1 , —C(O)N(R x1 R x1a ), —S(O) 2 N(R x1 R x1a ), —S(O)N(R x1 R x1a ), —S(O) 2 R x1 , —S(O)R x1 , —N(R x1 )S(O) 2 N(R x1a R x1b ), —SR x1 , —N(R x1 R x1a ), —NO 2 , —OC(O)R x1 , —N(R x1 )C(O)R x1a , —N(R x1 )S(O) 2 R x
  • a maximum of 6 —H atoms of an optionally substituted molecule are independently replaced by a substituent, e.g. 5 —H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, 4 —H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, 3 —H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, 2 —H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, or 1 —H atom is replaced by a substituent.
  • interrupted means that a moiety is inserted between two carbon atoms or—if the insertion is at one of the moiety's ends—between a carbon or heteroatom and a hydrogen atom, preferably between a carbon and a hydrogen atom.
  • C 1-4 alkyl alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched alkyl moiety having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples of straight-chain or branched C 1-4 alkyl are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl and tert-butyl.
  • C 1-4 alkyl groups are —CH 2 —, —CH 2 —CH 2 —, —CH(CH 3 )—, —CH 2 —CH 2 —CH 2 —, —CH(C 2 H 5 )—, —C(CH 3 ) 2 —.
  • Each hydrogen of a C 1-4 alkyl carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 1-4 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • C 1-6 alkyl alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched alkyl moiety having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples of straight-chain and branched C 1-6 alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 2-methylbutyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, n-hexyl, 2-methylpentyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, 2,3-dimethylbutyl and 3,3-dimethylpropyl.
  • C 1-6 alkyl groups are —CH 2 —, —CH 2 —CH 2 —, —CH(CH 3 )—, —CH 2 —CH 2 —CH 2 —, —CH(C 2 H 5 )— and —C(CH 3 ) 2 —.
  • Each hydrogen atom of a C 1-6 carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 1-6 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • C 1-10 alkyl means an alkyl chain having 1 to 10, 1 to 20 or 1 to 50 carbon atoms, respectively, wherein each hydrogen atom of the C 1-10 , C 1-20 or C 1-50 carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 1-10 or C 1-50 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • C 2-6 alkenyl alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples are —CH ⁇ CH 2 , —CH ⁇ CH—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH ⁇ CH 2 , —CH ⁇ CHCH 2 —CH 3 and —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ CH 2 . When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the C 2-6 alkenyl group, then an example for such C 2-6 alkenyl is —CH ⁇ CH—.
  • Each hydrogen atom of a C 2-6 alkenyl moiety may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 2-6 alkenyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • C 2-10 alkenyl means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond having 2 to 10, 2 to 20 or 2 to 50 carbon atoms.
  • Each hydrogen atom of a C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-20 alkenyl or C 2-50 alkenyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-20 alkenyl or C 2-50 alkenyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • C 2-6 alkynyl alone or in combination means straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples are —C ⁇ CH, —CH 2 —C ⁇ CH, CH 2 —CH 2 —C ⁇ CH and CH 2 —C ⁇ C—CH 3 . When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the alkynyl group, then an example is —C ⁇ C—. Each hydrogen atom of a C 2-6 alkynyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, one or more double bond(s) may occur. Optionally, a C 2-6 alkynyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • C 2-10 alkynyl C 2-20 alkynyl
  • C 2-50 alkynyl alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond having 2 to 10, 2 to 20 or 2 to 50 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Each hydrogen atom of a C 2-10 alkynyl, C 2-20 alkynyl or C 2-50 alkynyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • one or more double bond(s) may occur.
  • a C 2-10 alkynyl, C 2-20 alkynyl or C 2-50 alkynyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • a C 1-4 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-10 alkyl, C 1-20 alkyl, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-20 alkenyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 2-10 alkynyl, C 2-20 alkenyl or C 2-50 alkynyl may optionally be interrupted by one or more moieties which are preferably selected from the group consisting of
  • C 3-10 cycloalkyl means a cyclic alkyl chain having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, which may be saturated or unsaturated, e.g. cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl or cyclodecyl.
  • Each hydrogen atom of a C 3-10 cycloalkyl carbon may be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • the term “C 3-10 cycloalkyl” also includes bridged bicycles like norbornane or norbornene.
  • 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl or “8- to 30-membered carbopolycycle” means a cyclic moiety of two or more rings with 8 to 30 ring atoms, where two neighboring rings share at least one ring atom and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated).
  • a 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl means a cyclic moiety of two, three, four or five rings, more preferably of two, three or four rings.
  • the term “3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl” or “3- to 10-membered heterocycle” means a ring with 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 ring atoms that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated) wherein at least one ring atom up to 4 ring atoms are replaced by a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur (including —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —), oxygen and nitrogen (including ⁇ N(O)—) and wherein the ring is linked to the rest of the molecule via a carbon or nitrogen atom.
  • 3- to 10-membered heterocycles include but are not limited to aziridine, oxirane, thiirane, azirine, oxirene, thiirene, azetidine, oxetane, thietane, furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyrroline, imidazole, imidazoline, pyrazole, pyrazoline, oxazole, oxazoline, isoxazole, isoxazoline, thiazole, thiazoline, isothiazole, isothiazoline, thiadiazole, thiadiazoline, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, pyrrolidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, oxazolidine, isoxazolidine, thiazolidine, isothiazolidine, thiadiazolidine, sulfolane, pyran, dihydropyran, tetra
  • the term “8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl” or “8- to 11-membered heterobicycle” means a heterocyclic moiety of two rings with 8 to 11 ring atoms, where at least one ring atom is shared by both rings and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated) wherein at least one ring atom up to 6 ring atoms are replaced by a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur (including —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —), oxygen and nitrogen (including ⁇ N(O)—) and wherein the ring is linked to the rest of the molecule via a carbon or nitrogen atom.
  • Examples for an 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle are indole, indoline, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzothiazole, benzisothiazole, benzimidazole, benzimidazoline, quinoline, quinazoline, dihydroquinazoline, quinoline, dihydroquinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, decahydroquinoline, isoquinoline, decahydroisoquinoline, tetrahydroisoquinoline, dihydroisoquinoline, benzazepine, purine and pteridine.
  • 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle also includes spiro structures of two rings like 1,4-dioxa-8-azaspiro[4.5]decane or bridged heterocycles like 8-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octane.
  • Each hydrogen atom of an 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle carbon may be replaced by a substituent as defined below.
  • the term “8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl” or “8- to 30-membered heteropolycycle” means a heterocyclic moiety of more than two rings with 8 to 30 ring atoms, preferably of three, four or five rings, where two neighboring rings share at least one ring atom and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or unsaturated), wherein at least one ring atom up to 10 ring atoms are replaced by a heteroatom selected from the group of sulfur (including —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —), oxygen and nitrogen (including ⁇ N(O)—) and wherein the ring is linked to the rest of a molecule via a carbon or nitrogen atom.
  • R x and R y form the following structure:
  • R is C 3-10 cycloalkyl or 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl.
  • R x and R y form the following structure:
  • halogen means fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo. It is generally preferred that halogen is fluoro or chloro.
  • a more easily accessible test system in the form of an animal model may be needed to determine the dosage of PTH 1-84 required to maintain serum calcium within normal levels in otherwise hypocalcaemic subjects, which in human preferably refers to a serum albumin-adjusted calcium level of above 8.5 mg/dL and below 10.5 mg/dL with an optimal level of 9.5 mg/dL which corresponds to a range of 2.125 to 2.625 nmol/L with an optimum of 2.375 nmol/L.
  • TPTX thyroparathyroidectomized rats. Rats subjected to thyroparathyroidectomy are unable to produce parathyroid hormone, PTH, the major regulator of calcium homeostasis, and consequently will develop hypocalcemia.
  • serum calcium levels may vary between different species, such as between human and rats, so in order to achieve comparable results values have to be adjusted to accommodate these inter-species differences. Therefore, when using such animal models, it is necessary to first determine the species' normal serum calcium levels for a given sex and age.
  • Watchorn Biochem J. 1933; 27(6): 1875-1878
  • the normal serum calcium range is determined as a serum calcium concentration above the lower range of normal, e.g.
  • the normal serum calcium range is determined as a serum calcium concentration below the upper range of normal, e.g. as below 14 mg/dL (not adjusted) for female rats, even more preferably for female rats aged 13 to 22 weeks.
  • the normal range to target with treatment would be above 9.6 mg/dL (not adjusted) and preferably below 14 mg/dL (not adjusted) in such animals aged 13 to 22 weeks.
  • the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention is for use in the treatment of a condition treatable by PTH.
  • the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered no more frequent than once every 24 hours, such as every 24 hours, every 48 hours, every 72 hours, every 96 hours, every 120 hours, every 144 hours, once a week, once every two weeks.
  • administration of the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention occurs in multiples of 24 hours, i.e. every N times 24 hours, whereas N is an integer selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14.
  • the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 24 hours.
  • composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 48 hours.
  • composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 72 hours.
  • composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 96 hours.
  • composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 120 hours.
  • composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 144 hours.
  • composition for use of the present invention is administered once every week.
  • PTH 1-84 is administered every 24 hours. This means that if the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound is administered every 24 hours, both the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound and PTH 1-84 are administered with the same frequency. If the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound is administered with intervals longer than 24 hours, PTH 1-84 is administered more than once within the interval between two consecutive administrations of the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound. In such case the total amount of PTH1-84 is calculated from all administrations occurring in said interval between two consecutive administrations of the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound of the present invention to obtain the basis for determining the molar equivalent dose of the controlled-release PTH compound.
  • the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered by injection.
  • administration is by intramuscular injection.
  • administration is by intravenous injection.
  • administration is by subcutaneous injection.
  • the mode of administration of the controlled-release PTH compound and the mode of administration of the PTH 1-84 are identical, i.e. if the PTH 1-84 is administered by subcutaneous injection, also the controlled-release PTH compound is administered by subcutaneous injection. If the PTH 1-84 is administered by intramuscular injection, also the controlled-release PTH compound is administered by intramuscular injection.
  • the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is performed with a syringe. In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered with a pen injector. In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered with an auto injector.
  • the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered no more frequent than every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 required to maintain serum calcium within a normal range, preferably above 8.5 mg/dL, in humans over a 24 hour period.
  • the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 65%, more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 60%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 55%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 50%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 45%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 40%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 35% and most preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 30% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 required to maintain serum calcium within the normal range, preferably above 8.5 mg/dL, in humans over a 24 hour period.
  • the PTH compound comprises a PTH molecule or PTH moiety having the sequence of SEQ ID NO:47, SEQ ID NO:48, SEQ ID NO:49, SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:53, SEQ ID NO:54, SEQ ID NO:55, SEQ ID NO:107, SEQ ID NO:108, SEQ ID NO:109, SEQ ID NO:110, SEQ ID NO:111, SEQ ID NO:112, SEQ ID NO:113, SEQ ID NO:114 or SEQ ID NO:115. More preferably the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:110, SEQ ID NO:111 or SEQ ID NO:112.
  • the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:50.
  • the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:52.
  • the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:110.
  • the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:111.
  • the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 112.
  • the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • controlled-release PTH compound is water-insoluble.
  • a water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is selected from the group consisting of crystals, nanoparticles, microparticles, nanospheres and microspheres.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a crystal comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a nanoparticle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a microparticle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a nanosphere comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a microsphere comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a vesicle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • a vesicle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety is a micelle, liposome or polymersome.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a micelle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a liposome comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • a liposome is selected from the group consisting of aquasomes; non-ionic surfactant vesicles, such as niosomes and proniosomes; cationic liposomes, such as LeciPlex; transfersomes; ethosomes; ufasomes; sphingosomes; and pharmacosomes.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a polymersome comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound comprises at least one PTH molecule non-covalently embedded in a water-insoluble polymer.
  • a water-insoluble polymer comprises a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethacrylate,
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound comprises at least one PTH molecule non-covalently embedded in poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid) (PLGA).
  • PLGA poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid)
  • the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound comprises at least one PTH moiety covalently and reversibly conjugated to a water-insoluble polymer.
  • a water-insoluble polymer comprises a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(
  • such water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a compound comprising a conjugate D-L, wherein
  • controlled-release PTH compound is water-soluble.
  • such water-soluble controlled-release PTH compound is a compound of formula (Ia) or (Ib) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
  • the compounds of formula (Ia) and (Ib) are PTH prodrugs, more specifically water-soluble PTH prodrugs.
  • -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:47, SEQ ID NO:48, SEQ ID NO:49, SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:53, SEQ ID NO:54, SEQ ID NO:55, SEQ ID NO:107, SEQ ID NO:108, SEQ ID NO:109, SEQ ID NO:110, SEQ ID NO:111, SEQ ID NO:112, SEQ ID NO:113, SEQ ID NO:114 or SEQ ID NO:115. More preferably -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:110, SEQ ID NO:111 or SEQ ID NO:112.
  • -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:50.
  • -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:52.
  • -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:110.
  • -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:111.
  • -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:112.
  • Most preferably -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • the moiety -L 1 - is either conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of an amino acid residue of -D, to the N-terminal amine functional group or to the C-terminal carboxyl functional group of -D or to a nitrogen atom in the backbone polypeptide chain of -D.
  • Attachment to either the N-terminus or C-terminus can either be directly through the corresponding amine or carboxyl functional group, respectively, or indirectly wherein a spacer moiety is first conjugated to the amine or carboxyl functional group to which spacer moiety -L 1 - is conjugated.
  • the amino acid residue of PTH to which -L 1 - is conjugated comprises a functional group selected from the group consisting carboxylic acid, primary and secondary amine, maleimide, thiol, sulfonic acid, carbonate, carbamate, hydroxyl, aldehyde, ketone, hydrazine, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, phosphoric acid, phosphonic acid, haloacetyl, alkyl halide, acryloyl, aryl fluoride, hydroxylamine, sulfate, disulfide, vinyl sulfone, vinyl ketone, diazoalkane, oxirane, guanidine and aziridine.
  • a functional group selected from the group consisting carboxylic acid, primary and secondary amine, maleimide, thiol, sulfonic acid, carbonate, carbamate, hydroxyl, aldehyde, ketone, hydrazine, isocyanate, iso
  • the amino acid residue of PTH to which -L 1 - is conjugated comprises a functional group selected from the group consisting hydroxyl, primary and secondary amine and guanidine. Even more preferably the amino acid residue of PTH to which -L 1 - is conjugated comprises a primary or secondary amine functional group. Most preferably the amino acid residue of PTH to which -L 1 - is conjugated comprises a primary amine functional group.
  • the moiety -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of an amino acid residue of PTH said amino acid residue is selected from the group consisting of proteinogenic amino acid residues and non-proteinogenic amino acid residues.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a non-proteinogenic amino acid residue of PTH. It is understood that such non-proteinogenic amino acid is not found in the sequence of native PTH or fragments thereof and that it may only be present in variants and derivatives of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a proteinogenic amino acid residue of PTH.
  • said amino acid is selected from the group consisting of histidine, lysine, tryptophan, serine, threonine, tyrosine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid and arginine.
  • said amino acid is selected from the group consisting of lysine, aspartic acid, arginine and serine.
  • said amino acid is selected from the group consisting of lysine, arginine and serine.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a histidine of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a lysine of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a tryptophan of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a serine of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a threonine of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a tyrosine of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of an aspartic acid of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a glutamic acid of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of an arginine of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to the N-terminal amine functional group of PTH, either directly through the corresponding amine functional group or indirectly wherein a spacer moiety is first conjugated to the amine functional group to which spacer moiety -L 1 - is conjugated. Even more preferably, -L 1 - is directly conjugated to the N-terminal amine functional group of PTH.
  • -L 1 - is conjugated to the C-terminal functional group of PTH, either directly through the corresponding carboxyl functional group or indirectly wherein a spacer moiety is first conjugated to the carboxyl functional group to which spacer moiety -L 1 - is conjugated.
  • L 1 - is directly conjugated to the N-terminal amine functional group of PTH.
  • the moiety -L 1 - can be connected to -D through any type of linkage, provided that it is reversible.
  • -L 1 - is connected to -D through a linkage selected from the group consisting of amide, ester, carbamate, acetal, aminal, imine, oxime, hydrazone, disulfide and acylguanidine.
  • -L 1 - is connected to -D through a linkage selected from the group consisting of amide, ester, carbamate and acylguanidin. It is understood that some of these linkages are not reversible per se, but that in the present invention neighboring groups comprised in -L 1 - render these linkage reversible.
  • -L 1 - is connected to -D through an ester linkage.
  • -L 1 - is connected to -D through a carbamate linkage.
  • -L 1 - is connected to -D through an acylguanidine.
  • -L 1 - is connected to -D through an amide linkage.
  • the moiety -L 1 - is a reversible prodrug linker from which the drug, i.e. PTH, is released in its free form, i.e. it is a traceless prodrug linker.
  • Suitable prodrug linkers are known in the art, such as for example the reversible prodrug linker moieties disclosed in WO 2005/099768 A2, WO 2006/136586 A2, WO 2011/089216 A1 and WO 2013/024053 A1, which are incorporated by reference herewith.
  • -L 1 - is a reversible prodrug linker as described in WO 2011/012722 A1, WO 2011/089214 A1, WO 2011/089215 A1, WO 2013/024052 A1 and WO 2013/160340 A1 which are incorporated by reference herewith.
  • a particularly preferred moiety -L 1 - is disclosed in WO 2009/095479 A2. Accordingly, in a preferred embodiment the moiety -L 1 - is of formula (II):
  • -L 1 - of formula (II) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • Suitable 3- to 10-membered heterocycles formed by —R 3 /—R 3a of formula (II) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached are the following:
  • -L 1 - of formula (II) may optionally be further substituted.
  • any substituent may be used as far as the cleavage principle is not affected, i.e. the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (II) is not replaced and the nitrogen of the moiety
  • —R 1 or —R 1a of formula (II) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 2 or —R 2a of formula (II) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 3 or —R 3a of formula (II) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 4 of formula (II) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 5 or —R 5a of formula (II) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 6 of formula (II) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 7 or —R 7a of formula (II) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 8 or —R 8a of formula (II) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 9 or —R 9a of formula (II) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 10 is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 11 is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —X— of formula (II) is selected from the group consisting of —C(R 4 R 4a )—, —N(R 4 )— and —C(R 7 R 7a )—.
  • —X— of formula (II) is —C(R 4 R 4a )—.
  • —X— of formula (II) is —C(R 7 R 7a )—.
  • —R 7 of formula (II) is —NR 10 —(C ⁇ O)—R 11 .
  • —R 7a of formula (II) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R 7a of formula (II) is —H.
  • —R 10 is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R 10 is methyl.
  • —R 11 is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R 11 is —H.
  • —R 11 is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —X— of formula (II) is —N(R 4 )—.
  • —R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl.
  • —R 4 is —H.
  • X 1 of formula (II) is C.
  • ⁇ X 3 of formula (II) is ⁇ O.
  • —X 2 — of formula (II) is —C(R 8 R 8a )—.
  • —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (II) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (II) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (II) are —H.
  • —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (II) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl.
  • At least one of —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (II) is —H, more preferably both —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (II) are —H.
  • At least one of —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (II) is methyl, more preferably both —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (II) are methyl.
  • —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (II) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (II) is —H.
  • —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (II) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl.
  • At least one of —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (II) is methyl, more preferably —R 3 of formula (II) is methyl and —R 3a of formula (II) is —H.
  • —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (II) are both —H.
  • -D is connected to -L 1 - through a nitrogen by forming an amide bond.
  • the moiety -L 1 - is of formula (IIa-i):
  • -L 1 - of formula (IIa-i) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (IIa-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (IIa-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (IIa-i) are —H.
  • —R 7 of formula (IIa-i) is —NR 10 —(C ⁇ O)—R 11 .
  • —R 7a of formula (II-i) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R 7a of formula (II-i) is —H.
  • —R 10 of formula (IIa-i) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R 10 of formula (IIa-i) is methyl.
  • —R 11 of formula (IIa-i) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R 11 of formula (IIa-i) is —H.
  • —R 11 of formula (IIa-i) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —X 2 — of formula (IIa-i) is —C(R 8 R 8a )—.
  • —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIa-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIa-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIa-i) are —H.
  • —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIa-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIa-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIa-i) are H.
  • —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIa-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIa-i) is methyl.
  • —R 3 of formula (IIa-i) is —H and —R 3a of formula (IIa-i) is methyl.
  • -L 1 - of formula (IIa-ii) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —X 2 — of formula (IIa-ii) is —C(R 8 R 8a )—.
  • —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIa-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIa-ii) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIa-ii) are —H.
  • —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIa-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIa-ii) is methyl.
  • —R 3 of formula (IIa-ii) is —H and —R 3a of formula (IIa-ii) is methyl.
  • —R 10 of formula (IIa-ii) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R 10 of formula (IIa-ii) is methyl.
  • —R 11 of formula (IIa-ii) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R 11 of formula (IIa-ii) is —H.
  • —R 11 of formula (IIa-ii) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • the moiety -L 1 - of formula (IIa-ii′) is not further substituted.
  • —X 2 — of formula (IIa-ii′) is —C(R 8 R 8a )—.
  • —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIa-ii′) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIa-ii′) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIa-ii′) are —H.
  • —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIa-ii′) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIa-ii′) is methyl.
  • —R 3 of formula (IIa-ii′) is —H and —R 3a of formula (IIa-ii′) is methyl.
  • —R 10 of formula (IIa-ii′) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R 10 of formula (IIa-ii′) is methyl.
  • -L 1 - of formula (IIa-iii) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • the moiety -L 1 - of formula (IIa-iii) is not further substituted.
  • the moiety -L 1 - of formula (IIa-iii′) is not further substituted.
  • -L 1 - of formula (IIb-i) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (IIb-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (IIb-i) is methyl. Even more preferably both —R 1 and —R 1a of formula (IIb-i) are methyl.
  • —R 4 of formula (IIb-i) is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, —R 4 of formula (IIb-i) is —H.
  • —X 2 — of formula (IIb-i) is —C(R 8 R 8a )—.
  • —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIb-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIb-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIb-i) are —H.
  • —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIb-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIb-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIb-i) are H.
  • —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIb-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIb-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIb-i) are —H.
  • -L 1 - of formula (IIb-ii) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIb-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIb-ii) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIb-ii) are —H.
  • —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIb-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIb-ii) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIb-ii) are H.
  • —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIb-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIb-ii) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 3 and —R 3a of formula (IIb-ii) are —H.
  • the moiety -L 1 - of formula (IIb-ii′) is not further substituted.
  • —X 2 — of formula (IIb-ii′) is —C(R 8 R 8a )—.
  • —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIb-ii′) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIb-ii′) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 8 and —R 8a of formula (IIb-ii′) are —H.
  • —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIb-ii′) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIb-ii′) is —H. Even more preferably both —R 2 and —R 2a of formula (IIb-ii′) are H.
  • —R 3a of formula (IIb-ii′) is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. In one embodiment —R 3a of formula (IIb-ii′) is —H.
  • -L 1 - of formula (IIb-iii) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • the moiety -L 1 - of formula (IIb-iii) is not further substituted.
  • the moiety -L 1 - of formula (IIb-iii′) is not further substituted.
  • -L 1 - of formula (III) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • alkyl as used herein includes linear, branched or cyclic saturated hydrocarbon groups of 1 to 8 carbons, or in some embodiments 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • alkoxy includes alkyl groups bonded to oxygen, including methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, cyclopropoxy, cyclobutoxy, and similar.
  • alkenyl includes non-aromatic unsaturated hydrocarbons with carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • alkynyl includes non-aromatic unsaturated hydrocarbons with carbon-carbon triple bonds.
  • aryl includes aromatic hydrocarbon groups of 6 to 18 carbons, preferably 6 to 10 carbons, including groups such as phenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl.
  • heteroaryl includes aromatic rings comprising 3 to 15 carbons containing at least one N, O or S atom, preferably 3 to 7 carbons containing at least one N, O or S atom, including groups such as pyrrolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, quinolyl, indolyl, indenyl, and similar.
  • alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl moieties may be coupled to the remainder of the molecule through an alkylene linkage.
  • the substituent will be referred to as alkenylalkyl, alkynylalkyl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, indicating that an alkylene moiety is between the alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety and the molecule to which the alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl is coupled.
  • halogen includes bromo, fluoro, chloro and iodo.
  • heterocyclic ring refers to a 4 to 8 membered aromatic or non-aromatic ring comprising 3 to 7 carbon atoms and at least one N, O, or S atom.
  • Examples are piperidinyl, piperazinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyrrolidine, and tetrahydrofuranyl, as well as the exemplary groups provided for the term “heteroaryl” above.
  • suitable substituents are selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or an additional ring, each optionally further substituted.
  • Optional substituents on any group, including the above, include halo, nitro, cyano, —OR, —SR, —NR 2 , —OCOR, —NRCOR, —COOR, —CONR 2 , —SOR, —SO 2 R, —SONR 2 , —SO 2 NR 2 , wherein each R is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl, or two R groups taken together with the atoms to which they are attached form a ring.
  • -L 1 - of formula (IV) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • Alkyl “alkenyl”, and “alkynyl” include linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbon groups of 1-8 carbons or 1-6 carbons or 1-4 carbons wherein alkyl is a saturated hydrocarbon, alkenyl includes one or more carbon-carbon double bonds and alkynyl includes one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds. Unless otherwise specified these contain 1-6 C.
  • Aryl includes aromatic hydrocarbon groups of 6-18 carbons, preferably 6-10 carbons, including groups such as phenyl, naphthyl, and anthracene
  • Heteroaryl includes aromatic rings comprising 3-15 carbons containing at least one N, O or S atom, preferably 3-7 carbons containing at least one N, O or S atom, including groups such as pyrrolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, quinolyl, indolyl, indenyl, and similar.
  • substituted means an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group comprising one or more substituent groups in place of one or more hydrogen atoms.
  • Substituents may generally be selected from halogen including F, Cl, Br, and I; lower alkyl including linear, branched, and cyclic; lower haloalkyl including fluoroalkyl, chloroalkyl, bromoalkyl, and iodoalkyl; OH; lower alkoxy including linear, branched, and cyclic; SH; lower alkylthio including linear, branched and cyclic; amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, silyl including alkylsilyl, alkoxysilyl, and arylsilyl; nitro; cyano; carbonyl; carboxylic acid, carboxylic ester, carboxylic amide, aminocarbonyl; aminoacyl; carbamate; urea;
  • -L 1 - of formula (V) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • Suitable substituents for formulas (VI) are alkyl (such as C 1-6 alkyl), alkenyl (such as C 2-6 alkenyl), alkynyl (such as C 2-6 alkynyl), aryl (such as phenyl), heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, heteroaryl (such as aromatic 4 to 7 membered heterocycle) or halogen moieties.
  • alkyl alkoxy
  • alkoxyalkyl aryl
  • alkaryl alkyl radicals of 1-8, preferably 1-4 carbon atoms, e.g. methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl and butyl, and aryl radicals of 6-10 carbon atoms, e.g. phenyl and naphthyl.
  • halogen includes bromo, fluoro, chloro and iodo.
  • -L 1 - of formula (VI) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • alkyl shall be understood to include, e.g. straight, branched, substituted C 1-12 alkyls, including alkoxy, C 3-8 cycloalkyls or substituted cycloalkyls, etc.
  • substituted shall be understood to include adding or replacing one or more atoms contained within a functional group or compounds with one or more different atoms.
  • Substituted alkyls include carboxyalkyls, aminoalkyls, dialkylaminos, hydroxyalkyls and mercaptoalkyls; substituted cycloalkyls include moieties such as 4-chlorocyclohexyl; aryls include moieties such as napthyl; substituted aryls include moieties such as 3-bromo-phenyl; aralkyls include moieties such as toluyl; heteroalkyls include moieties such as ethylthiophene; substituted heteroalkyls include moieties such as 3-methoxythiophone; alkoxy includes moieties such as methoxy; and phenoxy includes moieties such as 3-nitrophenoxy. Halo-shall be understood to include fluoro, chloro, iodo and bromo.
  • -L 1 - of formula (VII) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z.
  • -L 1 - of formula (VIII) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • -L 1 - of formula (IX) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2 -Z′.
  • prodrugs for use of the present invention -L 2 - is a chemical bond or a spacer moiety.
  • -L 2 - is a chemical bond.
  • -L 2 - is a spacer moiety.
  • -L 2 - is preferably selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R y1 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R y1 )—, —S(O)N(R y1 )—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O)—, —N(R y1 )S(O) 2 N(R y1a )—, —S—, —N(R y1 )—, —OC(OR y1 )(R y1a )—, —N(R y1 )C(O)N(R y1a )—, —OC(O)N(R y1 )—, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl;
  • —R y1 and —R y1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, -T, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —R y2 , which are the same or different, and wherein C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R y4 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R y4 )—, —S(O)N(R y4 )—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O)—, —N(
  • each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more —R y2 , which are the same or different;
  • each —R y2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, oxo ( ⁇ O), —COOR y5 , —OR y5 , —C(O)R y5 , —C(O)N(R y5 R y5a ), —S(O) 2 N(R y5 R y5a ), —S(O)N(R y5 R y5a ), —S(O) 2 R y5 , —S(O)R y5 , —N(R y5 )S(O) 2 N(R y5a R y5b ), —SR y5 , —N(R y5 R y5a ), —NO 2 , —OC(O)R y5 , —N(R y5 )C(O)R y5a , —N(R y5 )S(O) 2 R y5
  • each —R y3 , —R y3a , —R y4 , —R y4a , —R y5 , —R y5a and —R y5b is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, and C 1-6 alkyl, wherein C 1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • -L 2 - is even more preferably selected from -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R y1 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R y1 )—, —S(O)N(R y1 )—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O)—, —N(R y1 )S(O) 2 N(R y1a )—, —S—, —N(R y1 )—, —OC(OR y1 )(R y1a )—, —N(R y1 )C(O)N(R y1a )—, —OC(O)N(R y1 )—, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl; wherein
  • —R y1 and —R y1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, -T, C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, and C 2-10 alkynyl; wherein -T, C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, and C 2-10 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —R y2 , which are the same or different, and wherein C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, and C 2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R y4 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R y4 )—, —S(O)N(R y4 )—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O)—, —N(
  • each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more —R y2 , which are the same or different;
  • —R y2 is selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, oxo ( ⁇ O), —COOR y5 , —OR y5 , —C(O)R y5 , —C(O)N(R y5 R y5a ), —S(O) 2 N(R y5 R y5a ), —S(O)N(R y5 R y5a ), —S(O) 2 R y5 , —S(O)R y5 , —N(R y5 )S(O) 2 N(R y5a R y5b ), —SR y5 , —N(R y5 R y5a ), —NO 2 , —OC(O)R y5 , —N(R y5 ) C(O)R y5a , —N(R y5 )S(O) 2 R y5a
  • each —R y3 , —R y3a , —R y4 , —R y4a , —R y5 , —R y5a and —R y5b is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, and C 1-6 alkyl; wherein C 1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • -L 2 - is even more preferably selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R y1 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R y1 )—, —S(O)N(R y1 )—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O)—, —N(R y1 )S(O) 2 N(R y1a )—, —S—, —N(R y1 )—, —OC(OR y1 )(R y1a )—, —N(R y1 )C(O)N(R y1a )—, —OC(O)N(R y1 )—, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkyny
  • R y1 and —R y1a are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, -T, C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, and C 2-10 alkynyl;
  • each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl;
  • each —R y2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, and C 1-6 alkyl;
  • each —R y3 , —R y3a , —R y4 , —R y4a , —R y5 , —R y5a and —R y5b is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, and C 1-6 alkyl; wherein C 1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • -L 2 - is a C 1-20 alkyl chain, which is optionally interrupted by one or more groups independently selected from —O—, -T- and —C(O)N(R y1 )—; and which C 1-20 alkyl chain is optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from —OH, -T and —C(O)N(R y6 R y6a ); wherein —R y1 , —R y6 , —R y6a are independently selected from the group consisting of H and C 1-4 alkyl and wherein T is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropoly
  • -L 2 - has a molecular weight in the range of from 14 g/mol to 750 g/mol.
  • -L 2 - comprises a moiety selected from
  • -L 2 - has a chain lengths of 1 to 20 atoms.
  • chain length refers to the number of atoms of -L 2 - present in the shortest connection between -L 1 - and —Z.
  • -L 2 - is of formula (i)
  • n of formula (i) is selected from the group consisting of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9. Even more preferably n of formula (i) is 4, 5, 6, or 7. In one embodiment n of formula (i) is 4. In another embodiment n of formula (i) is 5. In another embodiment n of formula (i) is 6.
  • the moiety -L 1 -L 2 - is selected from the group consisting of
  • the moiety -L 1 -L 2 - is selected from the group consisting of
  • the moiety -L 1 -L 2 - is of formula (IIca-ii).
  • the moiety -L 1 -L 2 - is of formula (IIcb-iii).
  • the carrier —Z comprises a C 8-24 alkyl or a polymer.
  • —Z comprises a polymer, preferably a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-o
  • —Z has a molecular weight ranging from 5 to 200 kDa. Even more preferably, —Z has a molecular weight ranging from 8 to 100 kDa, even more preferably ranging from 10 to 80 kDa, even more preferably from 12 to 60, even more preferably from 15 to 40 and most preferably —Z has a molecular weight of about 20 kDa. In another equally preferred embodiment —Z has a molecular weight of about 40 kDa.
  • such water-soluble carrier —Z comprises a protein.
  • Preferred proteins are selected from the group consisting of carboxyl-terminal polypeptide of the chorionic gonadotropin as described in US 2012/0035101 A1 which are herewith incorporated by reference; albumin; XTEN sequences as described in WO 2011123813 A2 which are herewith incorporated by reference; proline/alanine random coil sequences as described in WO 2011/144756 A1 which are herewith incorporated by reference; proline/alanine/serine random coil sequences as described in WO 2008/155134 A1 and WO 2013/024049 A1 which are herewith incorporated by reference; and Fe fusion proteins.
  • —Z is a polysarcosine.
  • —Z comprises a poly(N-methylglycine).
  • —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety.
  • —Z comprises one random coil protein moiety.
  • —Z comprises two random coil proteins moieties.
  • —Z comprises three random coil proteins moieties.
  • —Z comprises four random coil proteins moieties.
  • —Z comprises five random coil proteins moieties.
  • —Z comprises six random coil proteins moieties.
  • —Z comprises seven random coil proteins moieties.
  • —Z comprises eight random coil proteins moieties.
  • such random coil protein moiety comprises at least 25 amino acid residues and at most 2000 amino acids. Even more preferably such random coil protein moiety comprises at least 30 amino acid residues and at most 1500 amino acid residues. Even more preferably such random coil protein moiety comprises at least 50 amino acid residues and at most 500 amino acid residues.
  • —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from alanine and proline. Even more preferably, at least 10%, but less than 75%, preferably less than 65%, of the total number of amino acid residues of such random coil protein moiety are proline residues.
  • such random coil protein moiety is as described in WO 2011/144756 A1 which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • Even more preferably —Z comprises at least one moiety selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:4, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:6, SEQ ID NO:7, SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO:9, SEQ ID NO:10, SEQ ID NO:11, SEQ ID NO:12, SEQ ID NO:13, SEQ ID NO:14, SEQ ID NO:15, SEQ ID NO:16, SEQ ID NO:17, SEQ ID NO:51 and SEQ ID NO:61 as disclosed in WO2011/144756 which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • a moiety comprising such random coil protein comprising alanine and proline will be referred to as “PA” or “PA moiety”.
  • —Z comprises a PA moiety.
  • —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from alanine, serine and proline. Even more preferably, at least 4%, but less than 40% of the total number of amino acid residues of such random coil protein moiety are proline residues.
  • such random coil protein moiety is as described in WO 2008/155134 A1 which is herby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • —Z comprises at least one moiety selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:4, SEQ ID NO:6, SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO:10, SEQ ID NO:12, SEQ ID NO:14, SEQ ID NO:16, SEQ ID NO:18, SEQ ID NO:20, SEQ ID NO:22, SEQ ID NO:24, SEQ ID NO:26, SEQ ID NO:28, SEQ ID NO:30, SEQ ID NO:32, SEQ ID NO:34, SEQ ID NO:36, SEQ ID NO:40, SEQ ID NO:42, SEQ ID NO:44, SEQ ID NO:46, SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:54 and SEQ ID NO:56 as disclosed in WO 2008/155134 A1, which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • a moiety comprising such random coil protein moiety comprising alanine, serine and proline will be referred to as “PAS” or “PAS mo
  • —Z comprises a PAS moiety.
  • —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from alanine, glycine and proline.
  • a moiety comprising such random coil protein moiety comprising alanine, glycine and proline will be referred to as “PAG” or “PAG moiety”.
  • —Z comprises a PAG moiety.
  • —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from proline and glycine.
  • a moiety comprising such random coil protein moiety comprising proline and glycine will be referred to as “PG” or “PG moiety”.
  • such PG moiety comprises a moiety of formula (a-0)
  • p of formula (a-0) is selected from the group consisting of 1, 2 and 3.
  • q of formula (a-0) is selected from 0, 1 and 2.
  • the PG moiety comprises the sequence of SEQ ID NO:122:
  • the PG moiety comprises the sequence of formula (a-0-a)
  • sequence of formula (a-0-a) comprises v replicates of the sequence of SEQ ID NO:122.
  • —Z comprises a PG moiety.
  • —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from alanine, glycine, serine, threonine, glutamate and proline.
  • such random coil protein moiety is as described in WO 2010/091122 A1 which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • —Z comprises at least one moiety selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:182, SEQ ID NO:183, SEQ ID NO:184; SEQ ID NO:185, SEQ ID NO:186, SEQ ID NO:187, SEQ ID NO:188, SEQ ID NO:189, SEQ ID NO:190, SEQ ID NO:191, SEQ ID NO:192, SEQ ID NO:193, SEQ ID NO:194, SEQ ID NO:195, SEQ ID NO:196, SEQ ID NO:197, SEQ ID NO:198, SEQ ID NO:199, SEQ ID NO:200, SEQ ID NO:201, SEQ ID NO:202, SEQ ID NO:203, SEQ ID NO:204, SEQ ID NO:205, SEQ ID NO:206, SEQ ID NO:207, SEQ ID NO:208, SEQ ID NO:209, SEQ ID NO:210, SEQ ID NO:211, SEQ ID NO:212, SEQ ID NO:213, SEQ ID NO:214, SEQ ID NO:186
  • a moiety comprising such random coil protein moiety comprising alanine, glycine, serine, threonine, glutamate and proline will be referred to as “XTEN” or “XTEN moiety” in line with its designation in WO 2010/091122 A1.
  • —Z comprises an XTEN moiety.
  • —Z comprises a fatty acid derivate.
  • Preferred fatty acid derivatives are those disclosed in WO 2005/027978 A2 and WO 2014/060512 A1 which are herewith incorporated by reference.
  • —Z is a hyaluronic acid-based polymer.
  • —Z is a carrier as disclosed in WO 2012/02047 A1 which is herewith incorporated by reference.
  • —Z is a carrier as disclosed in WO 2013/024048 A1 which is herewith incorporated by reference.
  • —Z is a PEG-based polymer, such as a linear, branched or multi-arm PEG-based polymer.
  • —Z is a linear PEG-based polymer.
  • —Z is a multi-arm PEG-based polymer.
  • —Z is a multi-arm PEG-based polymer having at least 4 PEG-based arms.
  • such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to a multitude of moieties -L 2 -L 1 -D, wherein each moiety -L 2 -L 1 -D is preferably connected to the end of an arm, preferably to the end of an arm.
  • such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16 moieties -L 2 -L 1 -D.
  • Even more preferably such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 2, 3, 4, 6 or 8 moieties -L 2 -L 1 -D.
  • multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 2, 4 or 6 moieties -L 2 -L 1 -D, even more preferably such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 4 or 6 moieties -L 2 -L 1 -D, and most preferably such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 4 moieties -L 2 -L 1 -D.
  • such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is a multi-arm PEG derivative as, for instance, detailed in the products list of JenKem Technology, USA (accessed by download from http://www.jenkemusa.com/Pages/PEGProducts.aspx on Dec. 18, 2014), such as a 4-arm-PEG derivative, in particular a 4-arm-PEG comprising a pentaerythritol core, an 8-arm-PEG derivative comprising a hexaglycerin core, and an 8-arm-PEG derivative comprising a tripentaerythritol core.
  • the water-soluble PEG-based carrier —Z comprises a moiety selected from:
  • —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer. In one embodiment —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having one, two, three, four, five or six branching points.
  • —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having one, two or three branching points.
  • —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having one branching point.
  • —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having two branching points.
  • —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having three branching points.
  • such branched PEG-based moiety —Z has a molecular weight of at least 10 kDa.
  • such branched moiety —Z has a molecular weight ranging from and including 10 kDa to 500 kDa, more preferably ranging from and including 10 kDa to 250 Da, even more preferably ranging from and including 10 kDa to 150 kDa, even more preferably ranging from and including 12 kDa to 100 kDa and most preferably ranging from and including 15 kDa to 80 kDa.
  • such branched moiety —Z has a molecular weight ranging from and including 10 kDa to 80 kDa. In one embodiment the molecular weight is about 10 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such branched moiety —Z is about 20 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such branched moiety —Z is about 30 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 40 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 50 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 60 kDa.
  • the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 70 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 80 kDa. Most preferably, such branched moiety —Z has a molecular weight of about 40 kDa.
  • —Z or —Z′ comprises a moiety
  • —Z comprises an amide bond.
  • —Z comprises a moiety of formula (a)
  • BP a of formula (a) is —N ⁇ .
  • BP a of formula (a) is >C ⁇ .
  • BP a of formula (a) is —CR ⁇ .
  • —R is —H. Accordingly, a of formula (a) is 0.
  • —S a — of formula (a) is a chemical bond.
  • —S a — of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl and C 2-10 alkynyl, which C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl and C 2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R 4 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R 4 )—, —S(O)N(R 4 )—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O)—, —N(R 4 )S(O) 2 N(R 4a )—, —S—, —N(R 4 )—, —OC(OR 4 )(R 4a )—, —N(R 4 )C(O)N(R 4a )—, and —OC(OR 4
  • —S a — of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C 1-10 alkyl which is interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)N(R 4 )— and —O—.
  • —S a′ — of formula (a) is a chemical bond.
  • —S a′ — of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl and C 2-10 alkynyl, which C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl and C 2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R 4 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R 4 )—, —S(O)N(R 4 )—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O)—, —N(R 4 )S(O) 2 N(R 4a )—, —S—, —N(R 4 )—, —OC(OR 4 )(R 4a )—, —N(R 4 )C(O)N(R 4a )—, and —OC(O)N(
  • —S a′ — of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, which are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —C(O)— and —C(O)N(R 4 )—.
  • —S a′′ — of formula (a) is a chemical bond.
  • —S a′′ — of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl and C 2-10 alkynyl, which C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl and C 2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R 4 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R 4 )—, —S(O)N(R 4 )—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O)—, —N(R 4 )S(O) 2 N(R 4a )—, —S—, —N(R 4 )—, —OC(OR 4 )(R 4a )—, —N(R 4 )C(O)N(R 4a )—, and —OC(O)N(
  • —S a′′ — of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, which are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —C(O)— and —C(O)N(R 4 )—.
  • —S a′′′ — of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl and C 2-10 alkynyl, which C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl and C 2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R 4 )—, —S(O) 2 N(R 4 )—, —S(O)N(R 4 )—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O)—, —N(R 4 )S(O) 2 N(R 4a )—, —S—, —N(R 4 )—, —OC(OR 4 )(R 4a )—, —N(R 4 )C(O)N(R 4a )—, and —OC(O)N—,
  • —S a′′′ — of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, which are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —C(O)— and —C(O)N(R 4 )—.
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) independently comprise a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-oxazo
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) independently comprise a PEG-based moiety.
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) independently comprise a PEG-based moiety comprising at least 20% PEG, even more preferably at least 30%, even more preferably at least 40% PEG, even more preferably at least 50% PEG, even more preferably at least 60% PEG, even more preferably at least 70% PEG, even more preferably at least 80% PEG and most preferably at least 90% PEG.
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) independently have a molecular weight ranging from and including 5 kDa to 50 kDa, more preferably have a molecular weight ranging from and including 5 kDa to 40 kDa, even more preferably ranging from and including 7.5 kDa to 35 kDa, even more preferably ranging from and 7.5 to 30 kDa, even more preferably ranging from and including 10 to 30 kDa.
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 5 kDa.
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 7.5 kDa.
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 10 kDa.
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 12.5 kDa.
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 15 kDa.
  • —P a′ , —P a′′ and —P a′′′ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 20 kDa.
  • —Z comprises one moiety of formula (a).
  • —Z comprises two moieties of formula (a).
  • —Z comprises three moieties of formula (a).
  • —Z is a moiety of formula (a).
  • —Z comprises a moiety of formula (b)
  • n and p of formula (b) are the same integer.
  • m and p of formula (b) are about 450.
  • —Z is a moiety of formula (b).
  • the carrier —Z′ is a water-insoluble polymer, even more preferably a hydrogel.
  • such hydrogel comprises a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-oxazo
  • the carrier —Z′ is a hydrogel, it is preferably a hydrogel comprising PEG or hyaluronic acid.
  • hydrogel comprises PEG.
  • the carrier —Z′ is a hydrogel as described in WO 2006/003014 A2, WO 2011/012715 A1 or WO 2014/056926 A1, which are herewith incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • —Z′ is a polymer network formed through the physical aggregation of polymer chains, which physical aggregation is preferably caused by hydrogen bonds, crystallization, helix formation or complexation.
  • such polymer network is a thermogelling polymer.
  • the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention is a prodrug
  • its total mass is preferably at least 10 kDa, such as at least 12 kDa, such as at least 15 kDa, such as at least 20 kDa or such as at least 30 kDa.
  • the controlled-release PTH compound is a water-soluble prodrug
  • its total mass preferably is at most 250 kDa, such as at most 200 kDa, 180 kDa, 150 kDa or 100 kDa. It is understood that no meaningful upper molecular weight limit can be provided in case the controlled-release PTH compound is water-insoluble.
  • controlled-release PTH compound is of formula (IIe-i):
  • -D is attached to the PTH prodrug of formula (IIe-i) through the N-terminal amine functional group of the PTH moiety.
  • PTH prodrug for use of the present invention is of formula (IIf-i):
  • -D is attached to the PTH prodrug of formula (IIf-i) through the N-terminal amine functional group of the PTH moiety.
  • the residual activity of the controlled-release PTH in the form of a PTH prodrug is less than 10%, more preferably less than 1%, even more preferably less than 0.1%, even more preferably less than 0.01%, even more preferably less than 0.001% and most preferably less than 0.0001%.
  • residual activity refers to the activity exhibited by the PTH prodrug with the PTH moiety bound to a carrier in relation to the activity exhibited by the corresponding free PTH.
  • activity refers to binding to an activation domain of the PTH/PTHrP1 receptor resulting in activation of adenylate cyclase to generate cAMP, phospholipase C to generate intracellular calcium, or osteoblastic expression of RANKL (which binds to RANK (Receptor Activator of Nuclear Factor kB) on osteoclasts.
  • measuring the residual activity of the PTH prodrug for use of the present invention takes time during which a certain amount of PTH will be released from the PTH prodrug and that such released PTH may distort the results measured for the PTH prodrug. It is thus accepted practice to test the residual activity of a prodrug with a conjugate in which the drug moiety, in this case PTH, is non-reversibly, i.e. stably, bound to a carrier, which as closely as possible resembles the structure of the PTH prodrug for which residual activity is to be measured.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention has a pH ranging from and including pH 3 to pH 8. More preferably, the pharmaceutical composition has a pH ranging from and including pH 4 to pH 6. Most preferably, the pharmaceutical composition has a pH ranging from and including pH 4 to pH 5.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention is a liquid or suspension formulation. It is understood that the pharmaceutical composition is a suspension formulation if the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention is water-insoluble.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention is a dry formulation which is reconstituted before administration to a patient.
  • Such liquid, suspension, dry or reconstituted pharmaceutical composition comprises at least one excipient.
  • Excipients used in parenteral formulations may be categorized as, for example, buffering agents, isotonicity modifiers, preservatives, stabilizers, anti-adsorption agents, oxidation protection agents, viscosifiers/viscosity enhancing agents, or other auxiliary agents. However, in some cases, one excipient may have dual or triple functions.
  • the at least one excipient comprised in the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is selected from the group consisting of
  • a further aspect of the present invention is a method of treating, controlling, delaying or preventing in a mammalian patient one or more conditions that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH, comprising the step of administering a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof no more frequent than once every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 administered at the same dosing frequency required to maintain serum calcium within normal levels over a 24 hour period.
  • the mammalian patient is a human patient.
  • the controlled-release PTH compound i.e. the time between two injections, mode of administration and dosage are as described above.
  • the condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH is selected from the group consisting of hypoparathyroidism, hyperphosphatemia, osteoporosis, fracture repair, osteomalacia, osteomalacia and osteoporosis in patients with hypophosphatasia, steroid-induced osteoporosis, male osteoporosis, arthritis, osteoarthritis, osteogenesis imperfecta, fibrous dysplasia, rheumatoid arthritis, Paget's disease, humoral hypercalcemia associated with malignancy, osteopenia, periodontal disease, bone fracture, alopecia, chemotherapy-induced alopecia, and thrombocytopenia.
  • the condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH is selected from the group consisting of hypoparathyroidism, hyperphosphatemia, fracture repair, arthritis, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, osteopenia, periodontal disease, bone fracture, alopecia, chemotherapy-induced alopecia, and thrombocytopenia.
  • hypoparathyroidism Most preferably said condition is hypoparathyroidism.
  • PEG 2 ⁇ 20 kDa maleimide Sunbright GL2-400MA was purchased from NOF Europe N.V., Grobbendonk, Belgium.
  • S-Trityl-6-mercaptohexanoic acid was purchased from Polypeptide, France, France.
  • HATU was obtained from Merck Biosciences GmbH, Schwalbach/Ts, Germany.
  • Fmoc-N-Me-Asp(OBn)-OH was obtained from Peptide International Inc., Louisville, KY, USA.
  • Fmoc-Aib-OH was purchased from Iris Biotech GmbH, Tredwitz, Germany. All other chemicals and reagents were purchased from Sigma Aldrich GmbH, Taufmün, Germany, unless a different supplier is mentioned.
  • Flash chromatography purifications were performed on an Isolera One system from Biotage AB, Sweden, using Biotage KP-Sil silica cartridges and n-heptane and ethyl acetate as eluents. Products were detected at 254 nm.
  • Ion exchange chromatography was performed using an Amersham Bioscience AEKTAbasic system equipped with a MacroCap SP cation exchanger column (Amersham Bioscience/GE Healthcare). 17 mM acetic acid pH 4.5 (solvent A) and 17 mM acetic acid, 1 M NaCl, pH 4.5 (solvent B) were used as mobile phases.
  • Size exclusion chromatography was performed using an Amersham Bioscience AEKTAbasic system equipped with HiPrep 26/10 desalting columns (Amersham Bioscience/GE Healthcare). 0.1% (v/v) acetic acid was used as mobile phase.
  • Analytical ultra-performance LC (UPLC)-MS was performed on a Waters Acquity system equipped with a Waters BEH300 C18 column (2.1 ⁇ 50 mm, 1.7 ⁇ m particle size, flow: 0.25 mL/min; solvent A: water containing 0.04% TFA (v/v), solvent B: acetonitrile containing 0.05% TFA (v/v)) coupled to a LTQ Orbitrap Discovery mass spectrometer from Thermo Scientific or coupled to a Waters Micromass ZQ.
  • Linker reagent 1f was synthesized according to the following scheme:
  • N-methyl-N-Boc-ethylenediamine 1a was dried in high vacuum and used in the next reaction step without further purification.
  • Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 10 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt.
  • Crude 3 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether ( ⁇ 18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 6 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt.
  • Crude 4 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether ( ⁇ 18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 20 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt.
  • Crude 9 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether ( ⁇ 18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 20 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and shaking the suspension for 1 h at rt.
  • Crude 10 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether ( ⁇ 18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • 0.15 mL of a 0.5 M NaH 2 PO 4 buffer (pH 7.4) was added to 0.5 mL of a 20 mg/mL solution of thiol 5 (10 mg, 1.84 ⁇ mol) in 1/1 (v/v) acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% TFA (v/v).
  • the solution was incubated at A for 10 min after which 238 ⁇ L of a 10 mg/mL solution of maleimide 11a (2.4 mg, 2.21 ⁇ mol) in 1/1 (v/v) acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% TFA (v/v) were added.
  • the solution was incubated for 20 min at rt. 10 ⁇ L TFA was added and the mixture was purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried to obtain 11b.
  • Conjugate 12 was synthesized as described for 11b by using thiol 6 (10 mg, 1.85 ⁇ mol) and maleimide 11a (2.4 mg, 2.21 ⁇ mol).
  • Conjugate 13 was synthesized as described for 11b by using thiol 7 (10 mg, 1.84 ⁇ mol) and maleimide 11a (2.4 mg, 2.21 ⁇ mol).
  • Conjugate 14 was synthesized as described for 11b by using thiol 8 (10 mg, 1.83 ⁇ mol) and maleimide 11a (2.4 mg, 2.21 ⁇ mol).
  • Conjugate 15 was synthesized as described for 11b by using thiol 10 (5.2 mg, 0.95 ⁇ mol) and maleimide 11a (1.23 mg, 1.14 ⁇ mol).
  • Conjugate 16 was purified by IEX followed by RP-HPLC using a linear gradient of solvent system A (water containing 0.1% AcOH v/v) and solvent system B (acetonitrile containing 0.1% AcOH v/v). The product containing fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Conjugate 17 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 4 (15 mg, 3.53 ⁇ mol) and PEG 2 ⁇ 20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 187 mg, 4.32 ⁇ mol).
  • Conjugate 18 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 5 (37 mg, 8.40 ⁇ mol) and PEG 2 ⁇ 20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 445 mg, 9.24 ⁇ mol). The reaction was quenched by addition of 50 ⁇ L TFA without prior addition of 2-mercaptoethanol. Conjugate 18 was purified by IEX followed by SEC for desalting. The product containing fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Conjugate 19 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 7 (27 mg, 6.14 ⁇ mol) and PEG 2 ⁇ 20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 325 mg, 7.50 ⁇ mol).
  • Conjugate 20 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 9 (38 mg, 8.59 ⁇ mol) and PEG 2 ⁇ 20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 455 mg, 9.45 ⁇ mol). The reaction was quenched by addition of 50 ⁇ L TFA without prior addition of 2-mercaptoethanol. Conjugate 20 was purified by IEX followed by SEC for desalting. The product containing fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Conjugate 21 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 10 (34 mg, 7.58 ⁇ mol) and PEG 2 ⁇ 20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 401 mg, 9.26 ⁇ mol).
  • TPTx Thyroparathyroidectomised Rats During a 28-Days Study with Daily Subcutaneous Injections with Conjugate 18 or PTH(1-84)
  • Serum calcium (sCa) and phosporous (sP) levels in the animals were measured pre- and post-dose on days 1, 6, 12 and 27.
  • bone turnover markers (P1NP and CTx) were measured and bone quality assessed by ex vivo pQCT.
  • Results The average sCa in the TPTx rats pre-dosing at day 1 was 8.3 mg/dL compared to 10.9 mg/dL in the sham operated control rats. The sP values were 8.7 mg/dL and 5.9 mg/dL, respectively. Compound 18 given daily at 1.2 nmol/kg elevated sCa to near-normal levels while lowering sP within a few days of administration.
  • BMD bone mineral density
  • BMC bone mineral content

Abstract

The present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTII compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof, for use in the treatment, control, delay or prevention of a condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH, pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTII compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof, for use in the treatment, control, delay or prevention of a condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH, wherein said pharmaceutical composition is administered no more frequent than once every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTII 1-84 administered every 24 hours required to maintain serum calcium within normal levels over said 24 hour period in humans.

Description

  • The present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof, for use in the treatment, control, delay or prevention of a condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH, wherein said pharmaceutical composition is administered no more frequent than once every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 administered every 24 hours required to maintain serum calcium within normal levels over said 24 hour period in humans and to methods of treating, controlling, delaying or preventing said conditions.
  • Hypoparathyroidism is a rare endocrine disorder of calcium and phosphate metabolism that most often arises as a result of parathyroid gland damage or removal during surgery of the thyroid gland. Hypoparathyroidism is unusual among endocrine disorders in that it has not been treated, until recently, by replacement with the missing hormone, parathyroid hormone, or PTH. Conventional therapy for hypoparathyroidism involves large doses of vitamin D and oral calcium supplementation, which, although often effective, is associated with marked swings in blood Ca2+ resulting in hypercalcemia and hypocalcemia, excess urinary calcium excretion, nephrocalcinosis and ectopic calcifications, including vascular, basal ganglia, and lens of eye.
  • Calcium is the most abundant mineral in the human body, and its tight regulation is required for many critical biological functions, such as bone mineralization, muscle contraction, nerve conduction, hormone release, and blood coagulation. It is particularly important to maintain calcium concentration as stable as possible, because of the high sensitivity of a variety of cell systems or organs, including the central nervous system, muscle, and exo/endocrine glands, to small variations in Ca2+. PTH is a major regulator of calcium homeostasis.
  • The inappropriately low PTH level in relation to serum Ca2| concentration, characteristic of hypoparathyroidism, leads to decreased renal tubular reabsorption of Ca2+ and simultaneously, to increased renal tubular reabsorption of phosphate. Thus, the main biochemical abnormalities of hypoparathyroidism are hypocalcemia and hyperphosphatemia. Clinical features of the disease include symptoms of hypocalcemia, such as perioral numbness, paresthesias, and carpal/pedal muscle spasms. Laryngeal spasm, tetany, and seizures are serious and potentially life-threatening complications. Hyperphosphatemia and an elevated calcium×phosphate product contributes to ectopic deposition of insoluble calcium phosphate complexes in soft tissues, including vasculature, brain, kidneys, and other organs.
  • Standard therapy of hypoparathyroidism is oral calcium and vitamin D supplementation. The goals of therapy are to a) ameliorate symptoms of hypocalcemia; b) maintain fasting scrum calcium within or slightly below to the low-normal range; c) maintain fasting serum phosphorus within the high normal range or only slightly elevated; d) avoid or minimize hypercalciuria; e) maintain a calcium-phosphate product at levels well below the upper limit of normal and f) avoid ectopic calcification of the kidney (stones and nephrocalcinosis) and other soft tissues.
  • Several concerns arise with prolonged use of calcium and active vitamin D in large doses, particularly with regard to hypercalciuria, kidney stones, nephrocalcinosis and ectopic soft tissue calcification. In addition, conventional therapy with calcium and active vitamin D does not alleviate quality of life complaints nor does it reverse abnormalities in bone remodeling characteristic of the disease. In short, there is a high need for improved therapies for hypoparathyroidism.
  • In 2015, Natpara, PTH(1-84), was approved for once-daily subcutaneous injection as an adjunct to vitamin D and calcium in patients with hypoparathyroidism. Natpara, PTH(1-84), was approved to control hypocalcemia based on a pivotal trial demonstrating that 42 percent of PTH(1-84) treated participants achieved normal blood calcium levels on reduced doses of calcium supplements and active forms of vitamin D, compared to 3 percent of placebo-treated participants. Following a time course in which serum calcium was monitored after injection, 71 percent of patients treated with PTH(1-84) developed hypercalcemia at one or more measurements during a 24-hour period. PTH(1-84) reduced urinary calcium excretion 2-8 hours after injection but over the 24-hour period, urinary calcium excretion did not change. Similarly, urinary phosphate excretion increased only during the first 8 hours after PTH(1-84) injection.
  • While this represents an important advance in the treatment of the disease, Natpara has not demonstrated an ability to reduce incidences of hypercalcemia (elevated serum calcium levels), hypocalcemia (low serum calcium), or hypercalciuria (elevated urinary calcium) relative to conventional therapy in treated patients.
  • As such, there is a high need for improved PTH based therapies for hypoparathyroidism.
  • PTH(1-34), or teriparatide, was approved by the FDA in 2002 for the treatment of osteoporosis. Despite not being approved for this indication, PTH(1-34) has historically been used for treatment of hypoparathyroidism with patients receiving twice- or thrice-daily injections. To facilitate more physiological PTH levels, clinical studies have been conducted with PTH(1-34) administered by pump delivery in comparison with twice-daily injections. Over 6-months, pump delivery produced normal, steady state calcium levels with minimal fluctuation and avoided the rise in serum and urine calcium levels that are evident soon after PTH injection. The marked reduction in urinary calcium excretion when PTH(1-34) is administered by pump may indicate that PTH must be continuously exposed to the renal tubule for the renal calcium-conserving effects to be realized. Pump delivery of PTH(1-34) achieved simultaneous normalization of markers of bone turnover, serum calcium, and urine calcium excretion. These results were achieved with a 65 percent lower daily PTH(1-34) dose and a reduced need for magnesium supplementation compared with the twice daily PTH(1-34) injection regimen.
  • However, continuous pump therapy is inconvenient and challenging for patients, and it is an object of the current invention to provide for a more convenient therapeutic option of providing continuous exposure to PTH.
  • Long-term daily administration of PTH is associated with a progressive cortical bone loss due to increased bone metabolism. In a 6-year follow-up of patients treated with PTH(1-84) (Rubin, JCEM 2016) bone turnover markers remained greater than pretreatment values, peaking at the early years after PTH(1-84) initiation and declining thereafter but remaining significantly higher than baseline values by year 6. Bone mineral density (BMD) by dual X-ray absorptometry (DXA) was consistent with known site-specific effects of PTH, namely increases in lumbar spine and declines in the distal ⅓ radius. The decrease observed at the distal ⅓ radius is consistent with the known effects of intermittent PTH to increase cortical porosity and endosteal resorption.
  • It is an object of this invention to provide for a method of intermittently administering PTH, with improved control of serum and urine calcium, serum phosphorus, and lower elevation of bone turnover markers than currently applied PTH therapies. Preferably intermittent means with daily intervals, or more preferred with weekly intervals.
  • In the preclinical development program of both Forteo, PTH(1-34) and Natpara, PTH(1-84) a dose dependent increase in osteosarcoma rate was observed in rats treated with daily injections of the PTH compound. In the Natpara study, dosing of the high dose rats were discontinued due to excessive deaths in this group, primarily from metastatic osteosarcoma. This is felt to be due to the sensitivity of rats to the anabolic effects of intermittent PTH. In contrast, continuous exposure to PTH is known to lack significant bone anabolic activity. As such is an object of this invention to provide for an intermittent PTH replacement therapy that provides for an infusion-like profile of PTH, resulting in improved symptom control with a lower administered dose. Preferably intermittent means with daily intervals, or more preferred or alternatively with weekly intervals.
  • In summary, there is a need for a more convenient and safer treatment of hypoparathyroidism with reduced side-effects.
  • It is therefore an object of the present invention to at least partially overcome the shortcomings described above.
  • This object is achieved with a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof, for use in the treatment, control, delay or prevention of a condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH, wherein said pharmaceutical composition is administered no more frequent than once every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 administered every 24 hours required to maintain serum calcium within normal levels over said 24 hour period in humans.
  • It was surprisingly found that such controlled-release PTH compound has a higher potency than PTH 1-84, so fewer molar equivalents need to be administered in a single administration to a patient to achieve beneficial serum calcium levels for at least 24 hours which improves efficacy and reduces the risks of side-effects.
  • It is understood that PTH 1-84 is the polypeptide with the sequence of SEQ ID NO:1.
  • Within the present invention the terms are used having the meaning as follows.
  • As used herein the terms “no more frequent than once every 24 hours” and “at least once every 24 hours” are used synonymously and mean that the time between two consecutive administrations is 24 hours or longer, meaning that there may for example be 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 120 hours, 144 hours or one week between two consecutive administrations.
  • As used herein the terms “within normal level” and “within the normal range” with regard to serum calcium levels refer to the calcium level ordinarily found in a subject of a given species, sex and age, provided as the range given by the lower limit of normal and the upper limit of normal. In humans, the normal level preferably corresponds to a serum calcium level of above 8.5 mg/dL (albumin-adjusted). In humans the upper limit of normal is below 10.5 mg/dL
  • As used herein the term “serum calcium above 8.5 mg/dL” refers to albumin-adjusted calcium concentrations.
  • As used herein the term “albumin-adjusted” with regard to calcium levels means that the measured serum calcium level is corrected for calcium bound to albumin according to the following formula:

  • albumin-adjusted serum calcium (mg/dL)=measured total Ca (mg/dL)+0.8(4.0−serum albumin [g/dL])
  • As used herein the term “non-adjusted” with regard to calcium levels means that the measured total calcium concentration (mg/dL) is not adjusted for albumin-binding of calcium.
  • The term “molar equivalent dose” refers to the dose in which the controlled-release PTH compound comprises the same number of PTH molecules or PTH molecules as a particular dose of PTH 1-84 comprises PTH 1-84 molecules. For example, if a controlled-release PTH compound comprises one PTH molecule or PTH moiety per controlled-release PTH compound the molar equivalent dose is 1 controlled-release PTH compound for every 1 molecule of PTH 1-84. If a controlled-release PTH compound comprises two PTH molecules or PTH moieties per controlled-release PTH compound the molar equivalent dose is 1 controlled-release PTH compound for every 2 molecules of PTH 1-84.
  • As used herein the term “controlled-release PTH compound” refers to any compound, conjugate, crystal or admixture that comprises at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety and from which the at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety is released with a release half-life of at least 12 hours.
  • As used herein the terms “release half-life” and “half-life” refer to the time required under physiological conditions (i.e. aqueous buffer, pH 7.4, 37° C.) until half of all PTH or PTH moieties, respectively, comprised in a controlled-release PTH compound are released from said controlled-release PTH compound.
  • As used herein the term “PTH” refers all PTH polypeptides, preferably from mammalian species, more preferably from human and mammalian species, more preferably from human and murine species, as well as their variants, analogs, orthologs, homologs, and derivatives and fragments thereof, that are characterized by raising serum calcium and renal phosphorus excretion, and lowering serum phosphorus and renal calcium excretion. The term “PTH” also refers to all PTH-related polypeptides (PTHrP), such as the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:121, that bind to and activate the common PTH/PTHrP1 receptor. Preferably, the term “PTH” refers to the PTH polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51 as well as its variants, homologs and derivatives exhibiting essentially the same biological activity, i.e. raising serum calcium and renal phosphorus excretion, and lowering serum phosphorus and renal calcium excretion.
  • Preferably, the term “PTH” refers to the following polypeptide sequences:
  • (PTH 1-84)
    SEQ ID NO: 1
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTKAKSQ
    (PTH 1-83)
    SEQ ID NO: 2
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTKAKS
    (PTH 1-82)
    SEQ ID NO: 3
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTKAK
    (PTH 1-81)
    SEQ ID NO: 4
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTKA
    (PTH 1-80)
    SEQ ID NO: 5
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTK
    (PTH 1-79)
    SEQ ID NO: 6
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLT
    (PTH 1-78)
    SEQ ID NO: 7
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVL
    (PTH 1-77)
    SEQ ID NO: 8
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNV
    (PTH 1-76)
    SEQ ID NO: 9
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVN
    (PTH 1-75)
    SEQ ID NO: 10
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADV
    (PTH 1-74)
    SEQ ID NO: 11
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKAD
    (PTH 1-73)
    SEQ ID NO: 12
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKA
    (PTH 1-72)
    SEQ ID NO: 13
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADK
    (PTH 1-71)
    SEQ ID NO: 14
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEAD
    (PTH 1-70)
    SEQ ID NO: 15
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEA
    (PTH 1-69)
    SEQ ID NO: 16
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGE
    (PTH 1-68)
    SEQ ID NO: 17
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLG
    (PTH 1-67)
    SEQ ID NO: 18
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSL
    (PTH 1-66)
    SEQ ID NO: 19
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKS
    (PTH 1-65)
    SEQ ID NO: 20
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEK
    (PTH 1-64)
    SEQ ID NO: 21
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHE
    (PTH 1-63)
    SEQ ID NO: 22
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESH
    (PTH 1-62)
    SEQ ID NO: 23
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVES
    (PTH 1-61)
    SEQ ID NO: 24
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVE
    (PTH 1-60)
    SEQ ID NO: 25
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLV
    (PTH 1-59)
    SEQ ID NO: 26
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVL
    (PTH 1-58)
    SEQ ID NO: 27
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNV
    (PTH 1-57)
    SEQ ID NO: 28
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDN
    (PTH 1-56)
    SEQ ID NO: 29
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKED
    (PTH 1-55)
    SEQ ID NO: 30
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKE
    (PTH 1-54)
    SEQ ID NO: 31
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKK
    (PTH 1-53)
    SEQ ID NO: 32
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRK
    (PTH 1-52)
    SEQ ID NO: 33
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPR
    (PTH 1-51)
    SEQ ID NO: 34
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRP
    (PTH 1-50)
    SEQ ID NO: 35
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQR
    (PTH 1-49)
    SEQ ID NO: 36
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQ
    (PTH 1-48)
    SEQ ID NO: 37
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGS
    (PTH 1-47)
    SEQ ID NO: 38
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAG
    (PTH 1-46)
    SEQ ID NO: 39
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDA
    (PTH 1-45)
    SEQ ID NO: 40
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRD
    (PTH 1-44)
    SEQ ID NO: 41
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPR
    (PTH 1-43)
    SEQ ID NO: 42
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAP
    (PTH 1-42)
    SEQ ID NO: 43
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLA
    (PTH 1-41)
    SEQ ID NO: 44
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPL
    (PTH 1-40)
    SEQ ID NO: 45
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAP
    (PTH 1-39)
    SEQ ID NO: 46
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGA
    (PTH 1-38)
    SEQ ID NO: 47
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALG
    (PTH 1-37)
    SEQ ID NO: 48
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVAL
    (PTH 1-36)
    SEQ ID NO: 49
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVA
    (PTH 1-35)
    SEQ ID NO: 50
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFV
    (PTH 1-34)
    SEQ ID NO: 51
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNF
    (PTH 1-33)
    SEQ ID NO: 52
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHN
    (PTH 1-32)
    SEQ ID NO: 53
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVH
    (PTH 1-31)
    SEQ ID NO: 54
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDV
    (PTH 1-30)
    SEQ ID NO: 55
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQD
    (PTH 1-29)
    SEQ ID NO: 56
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQ
    (PTH 1-28)
    SEQ ID NO: 57
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKL
    (PTH 1-27)
    SEQ ID NO: 58
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKK
    (PTH 1-26)
    SEQ ID NO: 59
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRK
    (PTH 1-25)
    SEQ ID NO: 60
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLR
    (amidated PTH 1-84)
    SEQ ID NO: 61
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTKAKSQ;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-83)
    SEQ ID NO: 62
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTKAKS;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-82)
    SEQ ID NO: 63
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTKAK;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-81)
    SEQ ID NO: 64
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTKA;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-80)
    SEQ ID NO: 65
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLTK;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-79)
    SEQ ID NO: 66
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVLT;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-78)
    SEQ ID NO: 67
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNVL;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-77)
    SEQ ID NO: 68
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVNV;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-76)
    SEQ ID NO: 69
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADVN;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-75)
    SEQ ID NO: 70
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKADV;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-74)
    SEQ ID NO: 71
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKAD;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-73)
    SEQ ID NO: 72
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADKA;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-72)
    SEQ ID NO: 73
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEADK;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-71)
    SEQ ID NO: 74
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEAD;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-70)
    SEQ ID NO: 75
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGEA;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-69)
    SEQ ID NO: 76
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLGE;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-68)
    SEQ ID NO: 77
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSLG;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-67)
    SEQ ID NO: 78
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKSL;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-66)
    SEQ ID NO: 79
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEKS;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-65)
    SEQ ID NO: 80
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHEK;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-64)
    SEQ ID NO: 81
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESHE;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-63)
    SEQ ID NO: 82
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVESH;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-62)
    SEQ ID NO: 83
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVES;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-61)
    SEQ ID NO: 84
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLVE;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-60)
    SEQ ID NO: 85
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVLV;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-59)
    SEQ ID NO: 86
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNVL;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-58)
    SEQ ID NO: 87
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDNV;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-57)
    SEQ ID NO: 88
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKEDN;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-56)
    SEQ ID NO: 89
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKED;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-55)
    SEQ ID NO: 90
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKKE;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-54)
    SEQ ID NO: 91
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRKK;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-53)
    SEQ ID NO: 92
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPRK;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-52)
    SEQ ID NO: 93
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRPR;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-51)
    SEQ ID NO: 94
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQRP;
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-50)
    SEQ ID NO: 95
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQR; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-49)
    SEQ ID NO: 96
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGSQ; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-48)
    SEQ ID NO: 97
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAGS; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-47)
    SEQ ID NO: 98
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDAG; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-46)
    SEQ ID NO: 99
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRDA; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-45)
    SEQ ID NO: 100
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPRD; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-44)
    SEQ ID NO: 101
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAPR; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-43)
    SEQ ID NO: 102
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLAP; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-42)
    SEQ ID NO: 103
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPLA; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-41)
    SEQ ID NO: 104
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAPL; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-40)
    SEQ ID NO: 105
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGAP; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-39)
    SEQ ID NO: 106
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALGA; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-38)
    SEQ ID NO: 107
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVALG; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-37)
    SEQ ID NO: 108
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVAL; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-36)
    SEQ ID NO: 109
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFVA; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-35)
    SEQ ID NO: 110
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNFV; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-34)
    SEQ ID NO: 111
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHNF; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-33)
    SEQ ID NO: 112
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVHN; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-32)
    SEQ ID NO: 113
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDVH; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-31)
    SEQ ID NO: 114
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQDV; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-30)
    SEQ ID NO: 115
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQD; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-29)
    SEQ ID NO: 116
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKLQ; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-28)
    SEQ ID NO: 117
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKKL; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-27)
    SEQ ID NO: 118
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRKK; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-26)
    SEQ ID NO: 119
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLRK; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (amidated PTH 1-25)
    SEQ ID NO: 120
    SVSEIQLMHNLGKHLNSMERVEWLR; 
    wherein the C-terminus is amidated
    (PTHrP)
    SEQ ID NO: 121
    AVSEHQLLHDKGKSIQDLRRRFFLHHLIAEIHTAEIRATSEVSPNSKPSPNTKNHPVRFGSDDEGRYLTQETNKVETYKEQPL
    KTPGKKKKGKPGKRKEQEKKKRRTRSAWLDSGVTGSGLEGDHLSDTSTTSLELDSRRH
  • More preferably, the term “PTH” refers to the sequence of SEQ ID:NOs 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114 and 115. Even more preferably, the term “PTH” refers to the sequence of SEQ ID:NOs 50, 51, 52, 110, 111 and 112. In a particularly preferred embodiment the term “PTH” refers to the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • As used herein, the term “PTH polypeptide variant” refers to a polypeptide from the same species that differs from a reference PTH or PTHrP polypeptide. Preferably, such reference is a PTH polypeptide sequence and has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51. Generally, differences are limited so that the amino acid sequence of the reference and the variant are closely similar overall and, in many regions, identical. Preferably, PTH polypeptide variants are at least 70%, 80%, 90%, or 95% identical to a reference PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, preferably to the PTH polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51. By a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence at least, for example, 95% “identical” to a query amino acid sequence, it is intended that the amino acid sequence of the subject polypeptide is identical to the query sequence except that the subject polypeptide sequence may include up to five amino acid alterations per each 100 amino acids of the query amino acid sequence. These alterations of the reference sequence may occur at the amino (N-terminal) or carboxy terminal (C-terminal) positions of the reference amino acid sequence or anywhere between those terminal positions, interspersed either individually among residues in the reference sequence or in one or more contiguous groups within the reference sequence. The query sequence may be an entire amino acid sequence of the reference sequence or any fragment specified as described herein. Preferably, the query sequence is the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • Such PTH polypeptide variants may be naturally occurring variants, such as naturally occurring allelic variants encoded by one of several alternate forms of a PTH or PTHrP occupying a given locus on a chromosome or an organism, or isoforms encoded by naturally occurring splice variants originating from a single primary transcript. Alternatively, a PTH polypeptide variant may be a variant that is not known to occur naturally and that can be made by mutagenesis techniques known in the art.
  • It is known in the art that one or more amino acids may be deleted from the N-terminus or C-terminus of a bioactive polypeptide without substantial loss of biological function. Such N- and/or C-terminal deletions are also encompassed by the term PTH polypeptide variant.
  • It is also recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art that some amino acid sequences of PTH or PTHrP polypeptides can be varied without significant effect of the structure or function of the polypeptide. Such mutants include deletions, insertions, inversions, repeats, and substitutions selected according to general rules known in the art so as to have little effect on activity. For example, guidance concerning how to make phenotypically silent amino acid substitutions is provided in Bowie et al. (1990), Science 247:1306-1310, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety, wherein the authors indicate that there are two main approaches for studying the tolerance of the amino acid sequence to change.
  • The term PTH polypeptide also encompasses all PTH and PTHrP polypeptides encoded by PTH and PTHrP analogs, orthologs, and/or species homologs. It is also recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art that PTHrP and PTHrP analogs bind to activate the common PTH/PTHrP1 receptor, so the term PTH polypeptide also encompasses all PTHrP analogs. As used herein, the term “PTH analog” refers to PTH and PTHrP of different and unrelated organisms which perform the same functions in each organism but which did not originate from an ancestral structure that the organisms' ancestors had in common. Instead, analogous PTH and PTHrP arose separately and then later evolved to perform the same or similar functions. In other words, analogous PTH and PTHrP polypeptides are polypeptides with quite different amino acid sequences but that perform the same biological activity, namely raising serum calcium and renal phosphorus excretion, and lowering serum phosphorus and renal calcium excretion.
  • As used herein the term “PTH ortholog” refers to PTH and PTHrP within two different species which sequences are related to each other via a common homologous PTH or PTHrP in an ancestral species, but which have evolved to become different from each other.
  • As used herein, the term “PTH homolog” refers to PTH and PTHrP of different organisms which perform the same functions in each organism and which originate from an ancestral structure that the organisms' ancestors had in common. In other words, homologous PTH polypeptides are polypeptides with quite similar amino acid sequences that perform the same biological activity, namely raising serum calcium and renal phosphorus excretion, and lowering serum phosphorus and renal calcium excretion. Preferably, PTH polypeptide homologs may be defined as polypeptides exhibiting at least 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% or 95% identity to a reference PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, preferably the PTH polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • Thus, a PTH polypeptide according to the invention may be, for example: (i) one in which at least one of the amino acids residues is substituted with a conserved or non-conserved amino acid residue, preferably a conserved amino acid residue, and such substituted amino acid residue may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code; and/or (ii) one in which at least one of the amino acid residues includes a substituent group; and/or (iii) one in which the PTH polypeptide is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol); and/or (iv) one in which additional amino acids are fused to the PTH polypeptide, such as an IgG Fc fusion region polypeptide or leader or secretory sequence or a sequence which is employed for purification of the above form of the polypeptide or a pre-protein sequence.
  • As used herein, the term “PTH polypeptide fragment” refers to any polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of a part of the amino acid sequence of a PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, preferably the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • More specifically, a PTH polypeptide fragment comprises at least 6, such as at least 8, at least 10 or at least 17 consecutive amino acids of a PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, more preferably of the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO:51. A PTH polypeptide fragment may additionally be described as sub-genuses of PTH or PTHrP polypeptides comprising at least 6 amino acids, wherein “at least 6” is defined as any integer between 6 and the integer representing the C-terminal amino acid of a PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, preferably of the polypeptide of SEQ ID No:51. Further included are species of PTH or PTHrP polypeptide fragments at least 6 amino acids in length, as described above, that are further specified in terms of their N-terminal and C-terminal positions. Also encompassed by the term “PTH polypeptide fragment” as individual species are all PTH or PTHrP polypeptide fragments, at least 6 amino acids in length, as described above, that may be particularly specified by a N-terminal and C-terminal position. That is, every combination of a N-terminal and C-terminal position that a fragment at least 6 contiguous amino acid residues in length could occupy, on any given amino acid sequence of a PTH or PTHrP polypeptide, preferably the PTH polypeptide of SEQ ID:NO51, is included in the present invention.
  • The term “PTH” also includes poly(amino acid) conjugates which have a sequence as described above, but having a backbone that comprises both amide and non-amide linkages, such as ester linkages, like for example depsipeptides. Depsipeptides are chains of amino acid residues in which the backbone comprises both amide (peptide) and ester bonds. Accordingly, the term “side chain” as used herein refers either to the moiety attached to the alpha-carbon of an amino acid moiety, if the amino acid moiety is connected through amine bonds such as in polypeptides, or to any carbon atom-comprising moiety attached to the backbone of a poly(amino acid) conjugate, such as for example in the case of depsipeptides. Preferably, the term “PTH” refers to polypeptides having a backbone formed through amide (peptide) bonds.
  • As the term PTH includes the above-described variants, analogs, orthologs, homologs, derivatives and fragments of PTH and PTHrP, all references to specific positions within a reference sequence also include the equivalent positions in variants, analogs, orthologs, homologs, derivatives and fragments of a PTH or PTHrP moiety, even if not specifically mentioned.
  • As used herein the term “micelle” means an aggregate of amphiphilic molecules dispersed in a liquid colloid. In aqueous solution a typical micelle forms an aggregate with the hydrophilic moiety of the surfactant molecules facing the surrounding solvent and the hydrophobic moiety of the surfactant molecule facing inwards, also called “normal-phase micelle”. “Invers micelles” have the hydrophilic moiety facing inwards and the hydrophobic moiety facing the surrounding solvent.
  • As used herein the term “liposome” refers to a vesicle, preferably a spherical vesicle, having at least one lipid bilayer. Preferably, liposomes comprise phospholipids, even more preferably phosphatidylcholine. The term “liposome” refers to various structures and sizes, such as, for example, to multilamellar liposome vesicles (MLV) having more than one concentric lipid bilayer with an average diameter of 100 to 1000 nm, small unilamellar liposome vesicles (SUV) having one lipid bilayer and an average diameter of 25 to 100 nm, large unilamellar liposome vesicles (LUV) having one lipid bilayer and an average diameter of about 1000 μm and giant unilamellar vesicles (GUV) having one lipid bilayer and an average diameter of 1 to 100 μm. The term “liposome” also includes elastic vesicles such as transfersomes and ethosomes, for example.
  • As used herein the term “aquasome” refers to spherical nanoparticles having a diameter of 60 to 300 nm that comprise at least three layers of self-assembled structure, namely a solid phase nanocrystalline core coated with an oligomeric film to which drug molecules are adsorbed with or without modification of the drug.
  • As used herein the term “ethosome” refers to lipid vesicles comprising phospholipids and ethanol and/or isopropanol in relatively high concentration and water, having a size ranging from tens of nanometers to micrometers.
  • As used herein the term “LeciPlex” refers to positively charged phospholipid-based vesicular system which comprises soy PC, a cationic agent, and a bio-compatible solvent like PEG 300, PEG 400, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol polyethylene glycol ether or 2-pyrrolidone or N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
  • As used herein the term “niosome” refers to unilamellar or multilamellar vesicles comprising non-ionic surfactants.
  • As used herein the term “pharmacosome” refers to ultrafine vesicular, micellar or hexagonal aggregates from lipids covalently bound to biologically active moieties.
  • As used herein the term “proniosome” refers to dry formulations of surfactant-coated carrier which on rehydration and mild agitation gives niosomes.
  • As used herein the term “polymersome” refers to an artificial spherical vesicle comprising a membrane formed from amphiphilic synthetic block copolymers and may optionally comprise an aqueous solution in its core. A polymersome has a diameter ranging from 50 nm to 5 μm and larger. The term also includes syntosomes, which are polymersomes engineered to comprise channels that allow certain chemicals to pass through the membrane into or out of the vesicle.
  • As used herein the term “sphingosome” refers to a concentric, bilayered vesicle in which an aqueous volume is entirely enclosed by a membranous lipid bilayer mainly composed of natural or synthetic sphingolipid.
  • As used herein the term “transferosome” refers to ultraflexible lipid vesicles comprising an aqueous core that are formed from a mixture of common polar and suitable edge-activated lipids which facilitate the formation of highly curved bilayers which render the transferosome highly deformable.
  • As used herein the term “ufasome” refers to a vesicle comprising unsaturated fatty acids.
  • As used herein the term “polypeptide” refers to a peptide comprising up to and including 50 amino acid monomers.
  • As used herein the term “protein” refers to a peptide of more than 50 amino acid residues. Preferably a protein comprises at most 20000 amino acid residues, such as at most 15000 amino acid residues, such as at most 10000 amino acid residues, such as at most 5000 amino acid residues, such as at most 4000 amino acid residues, such as at most 3000 amino acid residues, such as at most 2000 amino acid residues, such as at most 1000 amino acid residues. As used herein the term “physiological conditions” refers to an aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37° C.
  • As used herein the term “pharmaceutical composition” refers to a composition containing one or more active ingredients, such as for example at least one controlled-release PTH compounds, and one or more excipients, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination, complexation or aggregation of any two or more of the ingredients of the composition, or from dissociation of one or more of the ingredients, or from other types of reactions or interactions of one or more of the ingredients. Accordingly, the pharmaceutical compositions for use of the present invention encompass any composition made by admixing one or more controlled-release PTH compound and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • As used herein the term “liquid composition” refers to a mixture comprising water-soluble controlled-release PTH compound and one or more solvents, such as water.
  • The term “suspension composition” relates to a mixture comprising water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound and one or more solvents, such as water.
  • As used herein, the term “dry composition” means that a pharmaceutical composition is provided in a dry form. Suitable methods for drying are spray-drying and lyophilization, i.e. freeze-drying. Such dry composition of prodrug has a residual water content of a maximum of 10%, preferably less than 5% and more preferably less than 2%, determined according to Karl Fischer. Preferably, the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is dried by lyophilization.
  • The term “drug” as used herein refers to a substance, such as PTH, used in the treatment, cure, prevention, or diagnosis of a disease or used to otherwise enhance physical or mental well-being. If a drug is conjugated to another moiety, the moiety of the resulting product that originated from the drug is referred to as “biologically active moiety”.
  • As used herein the term “prodrug” refers to a conjugate in which a biologically active moiety is reversibly and covalently connected to a specialized protective group through a reversible linker moiety, also referred to as “reversible prodrug linker moiety”, which comprises a reversible linkage with the biologically active moiety and wherein the specialized protective group alters or eliminates undesirable properties in the parent molecule. This also includes the enhancement of desirable properties in the drug and the suppression of undesirable properties.
  • The specialized non-toxic protective group is referred to as “carrier”. A prodrug releases the reversibly and covalently bound biologically active moiety in the form of its corresponding drug. In other words, a prodrug is a conjugate comprising a biologically active moiety which is covalently and reversibly conjugated to a carrier moiety via a reversible prodrug linker moiety, which covalent and reversible conjugation of the carrier to the reversible prodrug linker moiety is either directly or through a spacer. Such conjugate releases the formerly conjugated biologically active moiety in the form of a free unmodified drug.
  • A “biodegradable linkage” or a “reversible linkage” is a linkage that is hydrolytically degradable, i.e. cleavable, in the absence of enzymes under physiological conditions (aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37° C.) with a half-life ranging from one hour to three months, preferably from one hour to two months, even more preferably from one hour to one month, even more preferably from one hour to three weeks, most preferably from one hour to two weeks. Accordingly, a stable linkage is a linkage having a half-life under physiological conditions (aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37° C.) of more than three months.
  • As used herein, the term “traceless prodrug linker” means a reversible prodrug linker, i.e. a linker moiety reversibly and covalently connecting the biologically active moiety with the carrier, which upon cleavage releases the drug in its free form. As used herein, the term “free form” of a drug means the drug in its unmodified, pharmacologically active form.
  • As used herein, the term “excipient” refers to a diluent, adjuvant, or vehicle with which the therapeutic, such as a drug or prodrug, is administered. Such pharmaceutical excipient can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, including but not limited to peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred excipient when the pharmaceutical composition is administered orally. Saline and aqueous dextrose are preferred excipients when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions are preferably employed as liquid excipients for injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, trehalose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. The pharmaceutical composition, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, like, for example, acetate, succinate, tris, carbonate, phosphate, HEPES (4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid), MES (2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid), or can contain detergents, like Tween, poloxamers, poloxamines, CHAPS, Igepal, or amino acids like, for example, glycine, lysine, or histidine. These pharmaceutical compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsions, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like. The pharmaceutical composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and excipients such as triglycerides. Oral formulation can include standard excipients such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the drug or biologically active moiety, together with a suitable amount of excipient so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient. The formulation should suit the mode of administration.
  • As used herein, the term “reagent” means a chemical compound which comprises at least one functional group for reaction with the functional group of another chemical compound or drug. It is understood that a drug comprising a functional group (such as a primary or secondary amine or hydroxyl functional group) is also a reagent.
  • As used herein, the term “moiety” means a part of a molecule, which lacks one or more atom(s) compared to the corresponding reagent. If, for example, a reagent of the formula “H—X—H” reacts with another reagent and becomes part of the reaction product, the corresponding moiety of the reaction product has the structure “H—X—” or “—X—”, whereas each “—” indicates attachment to another moiety. Accordingly, a biologically active moiety is released from a prodrug as a drug.
  • It is understood that if the sequence or chemical structure of a group of atoms is provided which group of atoms is attached to two moieties or is interrupting a moiety, said sequence or chemical structure can be attached to the two moieties in either orientation, unless explicitly stated otherwise. For example, a moiety “—C(O)N(R1)—” can be attached to two moieties or interrupting a moiety either as “—C(O)N(R1)—” or as “—N(R1)C(O)—”. Similarly, a moiety
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00001
  • can be attached to two moieties or can interrupt a moiety either as
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00002
  • or as
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00003
  • As used herein, the term “functional group” means a group of atoms which can react with other groups of atoms. Functional groups include but are not limited to the following groups: carboxylic acid (—(C═O)OH), primary or secondary amine (—NH2, —NH—), maleimide, thiol (—SH), sulfonic acid (—(O═S═O)OH), carbonate, carbamate (—O(C═O)N<), hydroxyl (—OH), aldehyde (—(C═O)H), ketone (—(C═O)—), hydrazine (>N—N<), isocyanate, isothiocyanate, phosphoric acid (—O(P═O)OHOH), phosphonic acid (—O(P═O)OHH), haloacetyl, alkyl halide, acryloyl, aryl fluoride, hydroxylamine, disulfide, sulfonamides, sulfuric acid, vinyl sulfone, vinyl ketone, diazoalkane, oxirane, and aziridine.
  • In case the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention comprise one or more acidic or basic groups, the invention also comprises their corresponding pharmaceutically or toxicologically acceptable salts, in particular their pharmaceutically utilizable salts. Thus, the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention comprising acidic groups can be used according to the invention, for example, as alkali metal salts, alkaline earth metal salts or as ammonium salts. More precise examples of such salts include sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts or salts with ammonia or organic amines such as, for example, ethylamine, ethanolamine, triethanolamine or amino acids. Controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention comprising one or more basic groups, i.e. groups which can be protonated, can be present and can be used according to the invention in the form of their addition salts with inorganic or organic acids. Examples for suitable acids include hydrogen chloride, hydrogen bromide, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acids, oxalic acid, acetic acid, tartaric acid, lactic acid, salicylic acid, benzoic acid, formic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, diethylacetic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, pimelic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malic acid, sulfaminic acid, phenylpropionic acid, gluconic acid, ascorbic acid, isonicotinic acid, citric acid, adipic acid, and other acids known to the person skilled in the art. For the person skilled in the art further methods are known for converting the basic group into a cation like the alkylation of an amine group resulting in a positively-charge ammonium group and an appropriate counterion of the salt. If the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention simultaneously comprise acidic and basic groups, the invention also includes, in addition to the salt forms mentioned, inner salts or betaines (zwitterions). The respective salts can be obtained by customary methods which are known to the person skilled in the art like, for example by contacting these compounds with an organic or inorganic acid or base in a solvent or dispersant, or by anion exchange or cation exchange with other salts. The present invention also includes all salts of the compounds for use of the present invention which, owing to low physiological compatibility, are not directly suitable for use in pharmaceuticals but which can be used, for example, as intermediates for chemical reactions or for the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable” means a substance that does cause harm when administered to a patient and preferably means approved by a regulatory agency, such as the EMA (Europe) and/or the FDA (US) and/or any other national regulatory agency for use in animals, preferably for use in humans.
  • As used herein the term “about” in combination with a numerical value is used to indicate a range ranging from and including the numerical value plus and minus no more than 10% of said numerical value, more preferably no more than 8% of said numerical value, even more preferably no more than 5% of said numerical value and most preferably no more than 2% of said numerical value. For example, the phrase “about 200” is used to mean a range ranging from and including 200+/−10%, i.e. ranging from and including 180 to 220; preferably 200+/−8%, i.e. ranging from and including 184 to 216; even more preferably ranging from and including 200+/−5%, i.e. ranging from and including 190 to 210; and most preferably 200+/−2%, i.e. ranging from and including 196 to 204. It is understood that a percentage given as “about 20%” does not mean “20%+/−10%”, i.e. ranging from and including 10 to 30%, but “about 20%” means ranging from and including 18 to 22%, i.e. plus and minus 10% of the numerical value which is 20.
  • As used herein, the term “polymer” means a molecule comprising repeating structural units, i.e. the monomers, connected by chemical bonds in a linear, circular, branched, crosslinked or dendrimeric way or a combination thereof, which may be of synthetic or biological origin or a combination of both. It is understood that a polymer may also comprise one or more other chemical groups and/or moieties, such as, for example, one or more functional groups. Preferably, a soluble polymer has a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa, e.g. a molecular weight of at least 1 kDa, a molecular weight of at least 2 kDa, a molecular weight of at least 3 kDa or a molecular weight of at least 5 kDa. If the polymer is soluble, it preferable has a molecular weight of at most 1000 kDa, such as at most 750 kDa, such as at most 500 kDa, such as at most 300 kDa, such as at most 200 kDa, such as at most 100 kDa. It is understood that for insoluble polymers, such as hydrogels, no meaningful molecular weight ranges can be provided. It is understood that also a protein is a polymer in which the amino acids are the repeating structural units, even though the side chains of each amino acid may be different.
  • As used herein, the term “polymeric” means a reagent or a moiety comprising one or more polymers or polymer moieties. A polymeric reagent or moiety may optionally also comprise one or more other moiety/moieties, which are preferably selected from the group consisting of:
      • C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, C2-50 alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; and
      • linkages selected from the group comprising
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00004
      • wherein
      • dashed lines indicate attachment to the remainder of the moiety or reagent, and —R and —Ra are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl.
  • The person skilled in the art understands that the polymerization products obtained from a polymerization reaction do not all have the same molecular weight, but rather exhibit a molecular weight distribution. Consequently, the molecular weight ranges, molecular weights, ranges of numbers of monomers in a polymer and numbers of monomers in a polymer as used herein, refer to the number average molecular weight and number average of monomers, i.e. to the arithmetic mean of the molecular weight of the polymer or polymeric moiety and the arithmetic mean of the number of monomers of the polymer or polymeric moiety.
  • Accordingly, in a polymeric moiety comprising “x” monomer units any integer given for “x” therefore corresponds to the arithmetic mean number of monomers. Any range of integers given for “x” provides the range of integers in which the arithmetic mean numbers of monomers lies. An integer for “x” given as “about x” means that the arithmetic mean numbers of monomers lies in a range of integers of x+/−10%, preferably x+/−8%, more preferably x+/−5% and most preferably x+/−2%.
  • As used herein, the term “number average molecular weight” means the ordinary arithmetic mean of the molecular weights of the individual polymers.
  • As used herein the term “water-soluble” with reference to a carrier means that when such carrier is part of the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention at least 1 g of the controlled-release PTH compound comprising such water-soluble carrier can be dissolved in one liter of water at 20° C. to form a homogeneous solution. Accordingly, the term “water-insoluble” with reference to a carrier means that when such carrier is part of a controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention less than 1 g of the controlled-release PTH compound comprising such water-insoluble carrier can be dissolved in one liter of water at 20° C. to form a homogeneous solution.
  • As used herein the term “water-soluble” with reference to the controlled-release PTH compound means that at least 1 g of the controlled-release PTH compound can be dissolved in one liter of water at 20° C. to form a homogeneous solution. Accordingly, the term “water-insoluble” with reference to the controlled-release PTH compound means that less than 1 g of the controlled-release PTH compound can be dissolved in one liter of water at 20° C. to form a homogeneous solution.
  • As used herein, the term “hydrogel” means a hydrophilic or amphiphilic polymeric network composed of homopolymers or copolymers, which is insoluble due to the presence of covalent chemical crosslinks. The crosslinks provide the network structure and physical integrity.
  • As used herein the term “thermogelling” means a compound that is a liquid or a low viscosity solution having a viscosity of less than 500 cps at 25° C. at a shear rate of about 0.1/second at a low temperature, which low temperature ranges between about 0° C. to about 10° C., but which is a higher viscosity compound of less than 10000 cps at 25° C. at a shear rate of about 0.1/second at a higher temperature, which higher temperature ranges between about 30° C. to about 40° C., such as at about 37° C.
  • As used herein, the term “PEG-based” in relation to a moiety or reagent means that said moiety or reagent comprises PEG. Preferably, a PEG-based moiety or reagent comprises at least 10% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 20% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 30% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 40% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 50% (w/w), such as at least 60 (w/w) PEG, such as at least 70% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 80% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 90% (w/w) PEG, such as at least 95%. The remaining weight percentage of the PEG-based moiety or reagent are other moieties preferably selected from the following moieties and linkages:
      • C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, C2-50 alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; and
      • linkages selected from the group comprising
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00005
      • wherein
      • dashed lines indicate attachment to the remainder of the moiety or reagent, and
      • —R and —Ra are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl.
  • As used herein, the term “PEG-based comprising at least X % PEG” in relation to a moiety or reagent means that said moiety or reagent comprises at least X % (w/w) ethylene glycol units (—CH2CH2O—), wherein the ethylene glycol units may be arranged blockwise, alternating or may be randomly distributed within the moiety or reagent and preferably all ethylene glycol units of said moiety or reagent are present in one block; the remaining weight percentage of the PEG-based moiety or reagent are other moieties preferably selected from the following moieties and linkages:
      • C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, C2-50 alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; and
      • linkages selected from the group comprising
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00006
      • wherein
      • dashed lines indicate attachment to the remainder of the moiety or reagent, and —R and —Ra are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl.
  • The ten “hyaluronic acid-based comprising at least X % hyaluronic acid” is used accordingly.
  • The term “substituted” as used herein means that one or more —H atom(s) of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a different atom or a group of atoms, which are referred to as “substituent”.
  • Preferably, the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —COORx1, —ORx1, —C(O)Rx1, —C(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), —S(O)2N(Rx1Rx1a), —S(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), —S(O)2Rx1, —S(O)Rx1, —N(Rx1)S(O)2N(Rx1aRx1b), —SRx1, —N(Rx1Rx1a), —NO2, —OC(O)Rx1, —N(Rx1)C(O)Rx1a, —N(Rx1)S(O)2Rx1a, —N(Rx1)S(O)Rx1a, —N(Rx1)C(O)ORx1a, —N(Rx1)C(O)N(Rx1aRx1b), —OC(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -T0, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T0, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —Rx2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T0-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Rx3)—, —S(O)2N(Rx3)—, —S(O)N(Rx3)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Rx3)S(O)2N(Rx3a)—, —S—, —N(Rx3)—, —OC(ORx3)(Rx3a)—, —N(Rx3)C(O)N(Rx3a)—, and —OC(O)N(Rx3)—;
  • —Rx1, —Rx1a, —Rx1b are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, -T0, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T0, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —Rx2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T0-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Rx3)—, —S(O)2N(Rx3)—, —S(O)N(Rx3)—; —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Rx3)S(O)2N(Rx3a)—, —S—, —N(Rx3)—, —OC(ORx3)(Rx3a)—, —N(Rx3)C(O)N(Rx3a)—, and —OC(O)N(Rx3)—;
  • each T0 is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T0 is independently optionally substituted with one or more —Rx2 which are the same or different;
  • each —Rx2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, oxo (═O), —COORx4, —ORx4, —C(O)Rx4, —C(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), —S(O)2N(Rx4Rx4), —S(O)N(Rx4Rx4), —S(O)2Rx4, —S(O)Rx4, —N(Rx4)S(O)2N(Rx4aRx4), —SRx4, —N(Rx4Rx4a), —NO2, —OC(O)Rx4, —N(Rx4)C(O)Rx4a, —N(Rx4)S(O)2Rx4a, —N(Rx4)S(O)Rx4a, —N(Rx4)C(O)ORx4a, —N(Rx4)C(O)N(Rx4aRx4b), —OC(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different;
  • each —Rx3, —Rx3a, —Rx4, —Rx4a, —Rx4b is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • More preferably, the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —COORx1, —ORx1, —C(O)Rx1, —C(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), —S(O)2N(Rx1Rx1a), —S(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), —S(O)2Rx1, —S(O)Rx1, —N(Rx1)S(O)2N(Rx1aRx1b), —SRx1, —N(Rx1Rx1a), —NO2, —OC(O)Rx1, —N(Rx1)C(O)Rx1a, —N(Rx1)S(O)2Rx1a, —N(Rx1)S(O)Rx1a, —N(Rx1)C(O)ORx1a, —N(Rx1)C(O)N(Rx1aRx1b), —OC(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -T0, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl; wherein -T0, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —Rx2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T0, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Rx3)—, —S(O)2N(Rx3)—, —S(O)N(Rx3)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Rx3)S(O)2N(Rx3a)—, —S—, —N(Rx3)—, —OC(ORx3)(Rx3a)—, —N(Rx3)C(O)N(Rx3a)—, and —OC(O)N(Rx3)—;
      • each —Rx1, —Rx1a, —Rx1b, —Rx3, —Rx3a is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, halogen, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl;
      • each T0 is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T0 is independently optionally substituted with one or more —Rx2, which are the same or different;
      • each —Rx2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, oxo (═O), —COORx4, —ORx4, —C(O)Rx4, —C(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), —S(O)2N(Rx4Rx4a), —S(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), —S(O)2Rx4, —S(O)Rx4, —N(Rx4)S(O)2N(Rx4aRx4b), —SRx4, —N(Rx4Rx4), —NO2, —OC(O)Rx4, N(Rx4)C(O)Rx4a, —N(Rx4)S(O)2Rx4a, —N(Rx4)S(O)Rx4a, —N(Rx4)C(O)ORx4a, —N(Rx4)C(O)N(Rx4aRx4), —OC(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different;
      • each —Rx4, —Rx4a, —Rx4b is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, halogen, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl;
  • Even more preferably, the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —COORx1, —ORx1, —C(O)Rx1, —C(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), —S(O)2N(Rx1Rx1a), —S(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), —S(O)2Rx1, —S(O)Rx1, —N(Rx1)S(O)2N(Rx1aRx1b), —SRx1, —N(Rx1Rx1a), —NO2, —OC(O)Rx1, —N(Rx1)C(O)Rx1a, —N(Rx1)S(O)2Rx1a, —N(Rx1)S(O)Rx1a, —N(Rx1)C(O)ORx1a, —N(Rx1)C(O)N(Rx1aRx1b), —OC(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -T0, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl; wherein -T0, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —Rx2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T0-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Rx3)—, —S(O)2N(Rx3)—, —S(O)N(Rx3)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Rx3)S(O)2N(Rx3a)—, —S—, —N(Rx3)—, —OC(ORx3)(Rx3a)—, —N(Rx3)C(O)N(Rx3a)—, and —OC(O)N(Rx3)—;
      • each —Rx1, —Rx1a, —Rx1b, —Rx2, —Rx3, —Rx3a is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, halogen, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl;
      • each T0 is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T0 is independently optionally substituted with one or more —Rx2, which are the same or different.
  • Preferably, a maximum of 6 —H atoms of an optionally substituted molecule are independently replaced by a substituent, e.g. 5 —H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, 4 —H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, 3 —H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, 2 —H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, or 1 —H atom is replaced by a substituent.
  • The term “interrupted” means that a moiety is inserted between two carbon atoms or—if the insertion is at one of the moiety's ends—between a carbon or heteroatom and a hydrogen atom, preferably between a carbon and a hydrogen atom.
  • As used herein, the term “C1-4 alkyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched alkyl moiety having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples of straight-chain or branched C1-4 alkyl are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl and tert-butyl. When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the C1-4 alkyl, then examples for such C1-4 alkyl groups are —CH2—, —CH2—CH2—, —CH(CH3)—, —CH2—CH2—CH2—, —CH(C2H5)—, —C(CH3)2—. Each hydrogen of a C1-4 alkyl carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, a C1-4 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • As used herein, the term “C1-6 alkyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched alkyl moiety having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples of straight-chain and branched C1-6 alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 2-methylbutyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, n-hexyl, 2-methylpentyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, 2,3-dimethylbutyl and 3,3-dimethylpropyl. When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the C1-6 alkyl group, then examples for such C1-6 alkyl groups are —CH2—, —CH2—CH2—, —CH(CH3)—, —CH2—CH2—CH2—, —CH(C2H5)— and —C(CH3)2—. Each hydrogen atom of a C1-6 carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, a C1-6 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • Accordingly, “C1-10 alkyl”, “C1-20 alkyl” or “C1-50 alkyl” means an alkyl chain having 1 to 10, 1 to 20 or 1 to 50 carbon atoms, respectively, wherein each hydrogen atom of the C1-10, C1-20 or C1-50 carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, a C1-10 or C1-50 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • As used herein, the term “C2-6 alkenyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples are —CH═CH2, —CH═CH—CH3, —CH2—CH═CH2, —CH═CHCH2—CH3 and —CH═CH—CH═CH2. When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the C2-6 alkenyl group, then an example for such C2-6 alkenyl is —CH═CH—. Each hydrogen atom of a C2-6 alkenyl moiety may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, a C2-6 alkenyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • Accordingly, the term “C2-10 alkenyl”, “C2-20 alkenyl” or “C2-50 alkenyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond having 2 to 10, 2 to 20 or 2 to 50 carbon atoms. Each hydrogen atom of a C2-10 alkenyl, C2-20 alkenyl or C2-50 alkenyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, a C2-10 alkenyl, C2-20 alkenyl or C2-50 alkenyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • As used herein, the term “C2-6 alkynyl” alone or in combination means straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples are —C≡CH, —CH2—C≡CH, CH2—CH2—C≡CH and CH2—C≡C—CH3. When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the alkynyl group, then an example is —C≡C—. Each hydrogen atom of a C2-6 alkynyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, one or more double bond(s) may occur. Optionally, a C2-6 alkynyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • Accordingly, as used herein, the term “C2-10 alkynyl”, “C2-20 alkynyl” and “C2-50 alkynyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond having 2 to 10, 2 to 20 or 2 to 50 carbon atoms, respectively. Each hydrogen atom of a C2-10 alkynyl, C2-20 alkynyl or C2-50 alkynyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, one or more double bond(s) may occur. Optionally, a C2-10 alkynyl, C2-20 alkynyl or C2-50 alkynyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • As mentioned above, a C1-4 alkyl, C1-6 alkyl, C1-10 alkyl, C1-20 alkyl, C1-50 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-20 alkenyl, C2-50 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C2-10 alkynyl, C2-20 alkenyl or C2-50 alkynyl may optionally be interrupted by one or more moieties which are preferably selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00007
      • wherein
      • dashed lines indicate attachment to the remainder of the moiety or reagent; and —R and —Ra are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl.
  • As used herein, the term “C3-10 cycloalkyl” means a cyclic alkyl chain having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, which may be saturated or unsaturated, e.g. cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl or cyclodecyl. Each hydrogen atom of a C3-10 cycloalkyl carbon may be replaced by a substituent as defined above. The term “C3-10 cycloalkyl” also includes bridged bicycles like norbornane or norbornene.
  • The term “8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl” or “8- to 30-membered carbopolycycle” means a cyclic moiety of two or more rings with 8 to 30 ring atoms, where two neighboring rings share at least one ring atom and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated). Preferably a 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl means a cyclic moiety of two, three, four or five rings, more preferably of two, three or four rings.
  • As used herein, the term “3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl” or “3- to 10-membered heterocycle” means a ring with 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 ring atoms that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated) wherein at least one ring atom up to 4 ring atoms are replaced by a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur (including —S(O)—, —S(O)2—), oxygen and nitrogen (including ═N(O)—) and wherein the ring is linked to the rest of the molecule via a carbon or nitrogen atom. Examples for 3- to 10-membered heterocycles include but are not limited to aziridine, oxirane, thiirane, azirine, oxirene, thiirene, azetidine, oxetane, thietane, furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyrroline, imidazole, imidazoline, pyrazole, pyrazoline, oxazole, oxazoline, isoxazole, isoxazoline, thiazole, thiazoline, isothiazole, isothiazoline, thiadiazole, thiadiazoline, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, pyrrolidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, oxazolidine, isoxazolidine, thiazolidine, isothiazolidine, thiadiazolidine, sulfolane, pyran, dihydropyran, tetrahydropyran, imidazolidine, pyridine, pyridazine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, tetrazole, triazole, triazolidine, tetrazolidine, diazepane, azepine and homopiperazine. Each hydrogen atom of a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 3- to 10-membered heterocyclic group may be replaced by a substituent as defined below.
  • As used herein, the term “8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl” or “8- to 11-membered heterobicycle” means a heterocyclic moiety of two rings with 8 to 11 ring atoms, where at least one ring atom is shared by both rings and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated) wherein at least one ring atom up to 6 ring atoms are replaced by a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur (including —S(O)—, —S(O)2—), oxygen and nitrogen (including ═N(O)—) and wherein the ring is linked to the rest of the molecule via a carbon or nitrogen atom. Examples for an 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle are indole, indoline, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzothiazole, benzisothiazole, benzimidazole, benzimidazoline, quinoline, quinazoline, dihydroquinazoline, quinoline, dihydroquinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, decahydroquinoline, isoquinoline, decahydroisoquinoline, tetrahydroisoquinoline, dihydroisoquinoline, benzazepine, purine and pteridine. The term 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle also includes spiro structures of two rings like 1,4-dioxa-8-azaspiro[4.5]decane or bridged heterocycles like 8-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octane. Each hydrogen atom of an 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle carbon may be replaced by a substituent as defined below.
  • Similarly, the term “8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl” or “8- to 30-membered heteropolycycle” means a heterocyclic moiety of more than two rings with 8 to 30 ring atoms, preferably of three, four or five rings, where two neighboring rings share at least one ring atom and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or unsaturated), wherein at least one ring atom up to 10 ring atoms are replaced by a heteroatom selected from the group of sulfur (including —S(O)—, —S(O)2—), oxygen and nitrogen (including ═N(O)—) and wherein the ring is linked to the rest of a molecule via a carbon or nitrogen atom.
  • It is understood that the phrase “the pair Rx/Ry is joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3-10 cycloalkyl or a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl” in relation with a moiety of the structure
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00008
  • means that Rx and Ry form the following structure:
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00009
  • wherein R is C3-10 cycloalkyl or 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl.
  • It is also understood that the phrase “the pair Rx/Ry is joint together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring A” in relation with a moiety of the structure
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00010
  • means that Rx and Ry form the following structure:
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00011
  • As used herein, “halogen” means fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo. It is generally preferred that halogen is fluoro or chloro.
  • In general, the term “comprise” or “comprising” also encompasses “consist of” or “consisting of”.
  • It is understood that experimenting with humans is subject to strict rules. Therefore, a more easily accessible test system in the form of an animal model may be needed to determine the dosage of PTH 1-84 required to maintain serum calcium within normal levels in otherwise hypocalcaemic subjects, which in human preferably refers to a serum albumin-adjusted calcium level of above 8.5 mg/dL and below 10.5 mg/dL with an optimal level of 9.5 mg/dL which corresponds to a range of 2.125 to 2.625 nmol/L with an optimum of 2.375 nmol/L. One such animal model are thyroparathyroidectomized (TPTX) rats. Rats subjected to thyroparathyroidectomy are unable to produce parathyroid hormone, PTH, the major regulator of calcium homeostasis, and consequently will develop hypocalcemia.
  • However, it is also understood that serum calcium levels may vary between different species, such as between human and rats, so in order to achieve comparable results values have to be adjusted to accommodate these inter-species differences. Therefore, when using such animal models, it is necessary to first determine the species' normal serum calcium levels for a given sex and age. For example, Watchorn (Biochem J. 1933; 27(6): 1875-1878) provides the normal range of serum calcium (not adjusted) of male rats as 10.29 to 13.16 mg/dL and as 9.61 to 14.04 mg/dL for female rats. Preferably, the normal serum calcium range is determined as a serum calcium concentration above the lower range of normal, e.g. as above 9.6 mg/dL (not adjusted) for female rats, even more preferably for female rats aged 13 to 22 weeks. Preferably, the normal serum calcium range is determined as a serum calcium concentration below the upper range of normal, e.g. as below 14 mg/dL (not adjusted) for female rats, even more preferably for female rats aged 13 to 22 weeks.
  • Accordingly, when subjecting female rats to thyroparathyroidectomy to obtain TPTX rats, the normal range to target with treatment would be above 9.6 mg/dL (not adjusted) and preferably below 14 mg/dL (not adjusted) in such animals aged 13 to 22 weeks.
  • Preferably, the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention is for use in the treatment of a condition treatable by PTH.
  • The pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered no more frequent than once every 24 hours, such as every 24 hours, every 48 hours, every 72 hours, every 96 hours, every 120 hours, every 144 hours, once a week, once every two weeks. Preferably, administration of the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention occurs in multiples of 24 hours, i.e. every N times 24 hours, whereas N is an integer selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14.
  • In one embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 24 hours.
  • In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 48 hours.
  • In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 72 hours.
  • In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 96 hours.
  • In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 120 hours.
  • In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered once every 144 hours.
  • In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered once every week.
  • In the present invention PTH 1-84 is administered every 24 hours. This means that if the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound is administered every 24 hours, both the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound and PTH 1-84 are administered with the same frequency. If the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound is administered with intervals longer than 24 hours, PTH 1-84 is administered more than once within the interval between two consecutive administrations of the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound. In such case the total amount of PTH1-84 is calculated from all administrations occurring in said interval between two consecutive administrations of the pharmaceutical composition comprising the controlled-release PTH compound of the present invention to obtain the basis for determining the molar equivalent dose of the controlled-release PTH compound.
  • The pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered by injection. In one embodiment administration is by intramuscular injection. In another embodiment administration is by intravenous injection. In another embodiment administration is by subcutaneous injection.
  • It is understood that the mode of administration of the controlled-release PTH compound and the mode of administration of the PTH 1-84 are identical, i.e. if the PTH 1-84 is administered by subcutaneous injection, also the controlled-release PTH compound is administered by subcutaneous injection. If the PTH 1-84 is administered by intramuscular injection, also the controlled-release PTH compound is administered by intramuscular injection.
  • In one embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is performed with a syringe. In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered with a pen injector. In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered with an auto injector.
  • In the present invention the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered no more frequent than every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 required to maintain serum calcium within a normal range, preferably above 8.5 mg/dL, in humans over a 24 hour period. Preferably, the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is administered with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 65%, more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 60%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 55%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 50%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 45%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 40%, even more preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 35% and most preferably with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 30% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 required to maintain serum calcium within the normal range, preferably above 8.5 mg/dL, in humans over a 24 hour period.
  • Preferably, the PTH compound comprises a PTH molecule or PTH moiety having the sequence of SEQ ID NO:47, SEQ ID NO:48, SEQ ID NO:49, SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:53, SEQ ID NO:54, SEQ ID NO:55, SEQ ID NO:107, SEQ ID NO:108, SEQ ID NO:109, SEQ ID NO:110, SEQ ID NO:111, SEQ ID NO:112, SEQ ID NO:113, SEQ ID NO:114 or SEQ ID NO:115. More preferably the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:110, SEQ ID NO:111 or SEQ ID NO:112.
  • In one embodiment the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:50.
  • In another embodiment the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:52.
  • In another embodiment the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:110.
  • In another embodiment the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:111.
  • In another embodiment the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 112.
  • Most preferably the PTH molecule or PTH moiety has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • In one embodiment the controlled-release PTH compound is water-insoluble.
  • Preferably, a water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is selected from the group consisting of crystals, nanoparticles, microparticles, nanospheres and microspheres.
  • In one embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a crystal comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • In another embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a nanoparticle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • In another embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a microparticle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • In another embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a nanosphere comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • In another embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a microsphere comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • In one embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a vesicle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety. Preferably, such vesicle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety is a micelle, liposome or polymersome.
  • In one embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a micelle comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • In another embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a liposome comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety. Preferably, such liposome is selected from the group consisting of aquasomes; non-ionic surfactant vesicles, such as niosomes and proniosomes; cationic liposomes, such as LeciPlex; transfersomes; ethosomes; ufasomes; sphingosomes; and pharmacosomes.
  • In another embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a polymersome comprising at least one PTH molecule or PTH moiety.
  • In another embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound comprises at least one PTH molecule non-covalently embedded in a water-insoluble polymer. Preferably, such water-insoluble polymer comprises a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-oxazolines), poly(hydroxymethacrylates), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamides), poly(hydroxypropyl methacrylates), poly(hydroxypropyloxazolines), poly(iminocarbonates), poly(lactic acids), poly(lactic-co-glycolic acids), poly(methacrylamides), poly(methacrylates), poly(methyloxazolines), poly(organophosphazenes), poly(ortho esters), poly(oxazolines), poly(propylene glycols), poly(siloxanes), poly(urethanes), poly(vinyl alcohols), poly(vinyl amines), poly(vinylmethylethers), poly(vinylpyrrolidones), silicones, celluloses, carbomethyl celluloses, hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses, chitins, chitosans, dextrans, dextrins, gelatins, hyaluronic acids and derivatives, functionalized hyaluronic acids, mannans, pectins, rhamnogalacturonans, starches, hydroxyalkyl starches, hydroxyethyl starches and other carbohydrate-based polymers, xylans, and copolymers thereof.
  • In a preferred embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound comprises at least one PTH molecule non-covalently embedded in poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid) (PLGA).
  • In another embodiment the water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound comprises at least one PTH moiety covalently and reversibly conjugated to a water-insoluble polymer. Preferably such water-insoluble polymer comprises a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-oxazolines), poly(hydroxymethacrylates), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamides), poly(hydroxypropyl methacrylates), poly(hydroxypropyloxazolines), poly(iminocarbonates), poly(lactic acids), poly(lactic-co-glycolic acids), poly(methacrylamides), poly(methacrylates), poly(methyloxazolines), poly(organophosphazenes), poly(ortho esters), poly(oxazolines), poly(propylene glycols), poly(siloxanes), poly(urethanes), poly(vinyl alcohols), poly(vinyl amines), poly(vinylmethylethers), poly(vinylpyrrolidones), silicones, celluloses, carbomethyl celluloses, hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses, chitins, chitosans, dextrans, dextrins, gelatins, hyaluronic acids and derivatives, functionalized hyaluronic acids, mannans, pectins, rhamnogalacturonans, starches, hydroxyalkyl starches, hydroxyethyl starches and other carbohydrate-based polymers, xylans, and copolymers thereof.
  • In one embodiment such water-insoluble controlled-release PTH compound is a compound comprising a conjugate D-L, wherein
      • D is a PTH moiety; and
      • L comprises a reversible prodrug linker moiety -L1-, which moiety -L1- is connected to the PTH moiety -D through a functional group of PTH;
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z′ and is optionally further substituted; wherein -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer moiety; and
      • —Z′ is a water-insoluble carrier moiety.
  • It is understood that a multitude of moieties -L2-L1-D is connected to a water-insoluble carrier —Z′ and that such controlled-release PTH compounds are PTH prodrugs, more specifically carrier-linked PTH prodrugs.
  • Preferred embodiments for -D, -L1-, -L2- and —Z′ are as described below.
  • In a preferred embodiment the controlled-release PTH compound is water-soluble.
  • In a preferred embodiment such water-soluble controlled-release PTH compound is a compound of formula (Ia) or (Ib) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof

  • Z
    Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-Parenopenst
    L2-L1-D)x  (Ia)

  • D
    Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-Parenopenst
    L1-L2-Z)y  (Ib),
      • wherein
      • -D is a PTH moiety;
      • -L1- is a reversible prodrug linker moiety reversibly and covalently connected to the PTH moiety -D through a functional group of PTH;
      • -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer moiety;
      • —Z is a water-soluble carrier moiety;
      • x is an integer selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16; and
      • y is an integer selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
  • It is understood that the compounds of formula (Ia) and (Ib) are PTH prodrugs, more specifically water-soluble PTH prodrugs.
  • Preferably, -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:47, SEQ ID NO:48, SEQ ID NO:49, SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:53, SEQ ID NO:54, SEQ ID NO:55, SEQ ID NO:107, SEQ ID NO:108, SEQ ID NO:109, SEQ ID NO:110, SEQ ID NO:111, SEQ ID NO:112, SEQ ID NO:113, SEQ ID NO:114 or SEQ ID NO:115. More preferably -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:51, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:110, SEQ ID NO:111 or SEQ ID NO:112.
  • In one embodiment -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:50.
  • In another embodiment -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:52.
  • In another embodiment -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:110.
  • In another embodiment -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:111.
  • In another embodiment -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:112.
  • Most preferably -D has the sequence of SEQ ID NO:51.
  • The moiety -L1- is either conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of an amino acid residue of -D, to the N-terminal amine functional group or to the C-terminal carboxyl functional group of -D or to a nitrogen atom in the backbone polypeptide chain of -D. Attachment to either the N-terminus or C-terminus can either be directly through the corresponding amine or carboxyl functional group, respectively, or indirectly wherein a spacer moiety is first conjugated to the amine or carboxyl functional group to which spacer moiety -L1- is conjugated.
  • Preferably, the amino acid residue of PTH to which -L1- is conjugated comprises a functional group selected from the group consisting carboxylic acid, primary and secondary amine, maleimide, thiol, sulfonic acid, carbonate, carbamate, hydroxyl, aldehyde, ketone, hydrazine, isocyanate, isothiocyanate, phosphoric acid, phosphonic acid, haloacetyl, alkyl halide, acryloyl, aryl fluoride, hydroxylamine, sulfate, disulfide, vinyl sulfone, vinyl ketone, diazoalkane, oxirane, guanidine and aziridine. Even more preferably the amino acid residue of PTH to which -L1- is conjugated comprises a functional group selected from the group consisting hydroxyl, primary and secondary amine and guanidine. Even more preferably the amino acid residue of PTH to which -L1- is conjugated comprises a primary or secondary amine functional group. Most preferably the amino acid residue of PTH to which -L1- is conjugated comprises a primary amine functional group.
  • If the moiety -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of an amino acid residue of PTH said amino acid residue is selected from the group consisting of proteinogenic amino acid residues and non-proteinogenic amino acid residues.
  • In one embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a non-proteinogenic amino acid residue of PTH. It is understood that such non-proteinogenic amino acid is not found in the sequence of native PTH or fragments thereof and that it may only be present in variants and derivatives of PTH.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a proteinogenic amino acid residue of PTH. Preferably said amino acid is selected from the group consisting of histidine, lysine, tryptophan, serine, threonine, tyrosine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid and arginine. Even more preferably said amino acid is selected from the group consisting of lysine, aspartic acid, arginine and serine. Even more preferably said amino acid is selected from the group consisting of lysine, arginine and serine.
  • In one embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a histidine of PTH.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a lysine of PTH.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a tryptophan of PTH.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a serine of PTH.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a threonine of PTH.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a tyrosine of PTH.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of an aspartic acid of PTH.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of a glutamic acid of PTH.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is conjugated to a functional group of the side chain of an arginine of PTH.
  • It is understood that not every PTH moiety may comprise all of these amino acid residues.
  • In a preferred embodiment -L1- is conjugated to the N-terminal amine functional group of PTH, either directly through the corresponding amine functional group or indirectly wherein a spacer moiety is first conjugated to the amine functional group to which spacer moiety -L1- is conjugated. Even more preferably, -L1- is directly conjugated to the N-terminal amine functional group of PTH.
  • In an equally preferred embodiment -L1- is conjugated to the C-terminal functional group of PTH, either directly through the corresponding carboxyl functional group or indirectly wherein a spacer moiety is first conjugated to the carboxyl functional group to which spacer moiety -L1- is conjugated.
  • Most preferably L1- is directly conjugated to the N-terminal amine functional group of PTH.
  • The moiety -L1- can be connected to -D through any type of linkage, provided that it is reversible. Preferably, -L1- is connected to -D through a linkage selected from the group consisting of amide, ester, carbamate, acetal, aminal, imine, oxime, hydrazone, disulfide and acylguanidine. Even more preferably -L1- is connected to -D through a linkage selected from the group consisting of amide, ester, carbamate and acylguanidin. It is understood that some of these linkages are not reversible per se, but that in the present invention neighboring groups comprised in -L1- render these linkage reversible.
  • In one embodiment -L1- is connected to -D through an ester linkage.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is connected to -D through a carbamate linkage.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is connected to -D through an acylguanidine.
  • In a preferred embodiment -L1- is connected to -D through an amide linkage.
  • The moiety -L1- is a reversible prodrug linker from which the drug, i.e. PTH, is released in its free form, i.e. it is a traceless prodrug linker. Suitable prodrug linkers are known in the art, such as for example the reversible prodrug linker moieties disclosed in WO 2005/099768 A2, WO 2006/136586 A2, WO 2011/089216 A1 and WO 2013/024053 A1, which are incorporated by reference herewith.
  • In another embodiment -L1- is a reversible prodrug linker as described in WO 2011/012722 A1, WO 2011/089214 A1, WO 2011/089215 A1, WO 2013/024052 A1 and WO 2013/160340 A1 which are incorporated by reference herewith.
  • A particularly preferred moiety -L1- is disclosed in WO 2009/095479 A2. Accordingly, in a preferred embodiment the moiety -L1- is of formula (II):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00012
      • wherein the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen, hydroxyl or thiol of -D which is a PTH moiety;
      • —X— is selected from the group consisting of —C(R4R4a)—; —N(R4)—; —O—; —C(R4R4a)—C(R5R5a)—; —C(R5R5a)—C(R4R4a)—; —C(R4R4a)N(R6)—; —N(R6)—C(R4R4a)—; —C(R4R4a)—O—; —O—C(R4R4a)—; and —C(R7R7a)—;
      • X1 is selected from the group consisting of C; and S(O);
      • —X2— is selected from the group consisting of —C(R8R8a)—; and —C(R8R8a)—C(R9R9a)—;
      • ═X3 is selected from the group consisting of ═O; ═S; and ═N—CN;
      • —R, —R1a, —R2, —R2a, —R4, —R4a, —R5, —R5a, —R6, —R8, —R8a, —R9 and —R9a are independently selected from the group consisting of —H; and C1-6 alkyl;
      • —R3 and —R3a are independently selected from the group consisting of —H; and C1-6 alkyl, provided that in case one of —R3 and —R3a or both are other than —H they are connected to N to which they are attached through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom;
      • —R7 is selected from the group consisting of —N(R10R10a); and —NR10—(C═O)—R11;
      • R7a, —R10, —R10a and —R11 are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H; and C1-6 alkyl;
      • optionally, one or more of the pairs —R1a/—R4a, —R1a/—R5a, —R1a/—R7a, —R4a/—R5a and —R8a/—R9a form a chemical bond;
      • optionally, one or more of the pairs —R1/—R1a, —R2/—R2a, —R4/—R4a, —R5/—R5a, —R8R8a and —R9/—R9a are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3-10 cycloalkyl; or 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl;
      • optionally, one or more of the pairs —R1/—R4, —R1/—R5, —R1/—R6, —R1/—R7a, —R4/—R5, —R4/—R6, —R8/—R9 and —R2/—R3 are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring A;
      • optionally, R3/R3a are joined together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocycle;
      • A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl; naphthyl; indenyl; indanyl; tetralinyl; C3-10 cycloalkyl; 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl; and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; and
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (II) is not replaced by -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ or a substituent;
        • wherein
        • -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer;
        • —Z is a water-soluble carrier; and
        • —Z′ is a water-insoluble carrier.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (II) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • In one embodiment -L1- of formula (II) is not further substituted.
  • It is understood that if —R3/—R3a of formula (II) are joined together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocycle, only such 3- to 10-membered heterocycles may be formed in which the atoms directly attached to the nitrogen are sp3-hybridized carbon atoms. In other words, such 3- to 10-membered heterocycle formed by —R3/—R3a together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached has the following structure:
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00013
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates attachment to the rest of -L1-;
      • the ring comprises 3 to 10 atoms comprising at least one nitrogen; and
      • R# and R## represent an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • It is also understood that the 3- to 10-membered heterocycle may be further substituted.
  • Exemplary embodiments of suitable 3- to 10-membered heterocycles formed by —R3/—R3a of formula (II) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached are the following:
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00014
      • wherein
      • dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of the molecule; and
      • —R is selected from the group consisting of —H and C1-6 alkyl.
  • -L1- of formula (II) may optionally be further substituted. In general, any substituent may be used as far as the cleavage principle is not affected, i.e. the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (II) is not replaced and the nitrogen of the moiety
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00015
  • of formula (II) remains part of a primary, secondary or tertiary amine, i.e. —R3 and —R3a are independently of each other —H or are connected to —N< through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • In one embodiment —R1 or —R1a of formula (II) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R2 or —R2a of formula (II) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R3 or —R3a of formula (II) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R4 of formula (II) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R5 or —R5a of formula (II) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R6 of formula (II) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R7 or —R7a of formula (II) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R8 or —R8a of formula (II) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R9 or —R9a of formula (II) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R10 is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′. In another embodiment —R11 is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • Preferably, —X— of formula (II) is selected from the group consisting of —C(R4R4a)—, —N(R4)— and —C(R7R7a)—.
  • In one embodiment —X— of formula (II) is —C(R4R4a)—.
  • In one preferred embodiment —X— of formula (II) is —C(R7R7a)—.
  • Preferably, —R7 of formula (II) is —NR10—(C═O)—R11.
  • Preferably, —R7a of formula (II) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R7a of formula (II) is —H.
  • Preferably, —R10 is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R10 is methyl.
  • Preferably, —R11 is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R11 is —H.
  • Preferably, —R11 is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • In another preferred embodiment —X— of formula (II) is —N(R4)—.
  • Preferably, —R4 is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. Preferably, —R4 is —H.
  • Preferably, X1 of formula (II) is C.
  • Preferably, ═X3 of formula (II) is ═O.
  • Preferably, —X2— of formula (II) is —C(R8R8a)—.
  • Preferably —R8 and —R8a of formula (II) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R8 and —R8a of formula (II) is —H. Even more preferably both —R8 and —R8a of formula (II) are —H.
  • Preferably, —R1 and —R1a of formula (II) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl.
  • In one preferred embodiment at least one of —R1 and —R1a of formula (II) is —H, more preferably both —R1 and —R1a of formula (II) are —H.
  • In another preferred embodiment at least one of —R1 and —R1a of formula (II) is methyl, more preferably both —R1 and —R1a of formula (II) are methyl.
  • Preferably, —R2 and —R2a of formula (II) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R2 and —R2a of formula (II) is —H.
  • Even more preferably both —R2 and —R2a of formula (II) are H.
  • Preferably, —R3 and —R3a of formula (II) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl.
  • In one preferred embodiment at least one of —R3 and —R3a of formula (II) is methyl, more preferably —R3 of formula (II) is methyl and —R3a of formula (II) is —H.
  • In another preferred embodiment —R3 and —R3a of formula (II) are both —H.
  • Preferably, -D is connected to -L1- through a nitrogen by forming an amide bond.
  • In one preferred embodiment the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIa-i):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00016
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond;
      • —R1, —R1a, —R2, —R2a, —R3, —R3a, —R7, —R7a and —X2— are used as defined in formula (II); and
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIa-i) is not replaced by -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ or a substituent.
  • It is understood that in case one of —R3, —R3a of formula (IIa-i) or both are other than —H they are connected to N to which they are attached through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (IIa-i) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIa-i) is not further substituted.
  • Preferably, —R1 and —R1a of formula (IIa-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R1 and —R1a of formula (IIa-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R1 and —R1a of formula (IIa-i) are —H.
  • Preferably, —R7 of formula (IIa-i) is —NR10—(C═O)—R11.
  • Preferably, —R7a of formula (II-i) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R7a of formula (II-i) is —H.
  • Preferably, —R10 of formula (IIa-i) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R10 of formula (IIa-i) is methyl.
  • Preferably, —R11 of formula (IIa-i) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R11 of formula (IIa-i) is —H.
  • Preferably, —R11 of formula (IIa-i) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • Preferably, —X2— of formula (IIa-i) is —C(R8R8a)—.
  • Preferably —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIa-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIa-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIa-i) are —H.
  • Preferably, —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIa-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIa-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIa-i) are H.
  • Preferably, —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIa-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIa-i) is methyl.
  • Preferably, —R3 of formula (IIa-i) is —H and —R3a of formula (IIa-i) is methyl.
  • More preferably the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIa-ii):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00017
      • wherein the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond;
      • —R2, —R2a, —R10, —R11 and —X2— are used as defined in formula (II); and
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIa-ii) is not replaced by -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ or a substituent.
  • It is understood that in case one of —R3, —R3a of formula (IIa-ii) or both are other than —H they are connected to N to which they are attached through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (IIa-ii) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIa-ii) is not further substituted.
  • Preferably, —X2— of formula (IIa-ii) is —C(R8R8a)—.
  • Preferably —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIa-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIa-ii) is —H. Even more preferably both —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIa-ii) are —H.
  • Preferably, —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIa-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIa-ii) is methyl.
  • Preferably, —R3 of formula (IIa-ii) is —H and —R3a of formula (IIa-ii) is methyl.
  • Preferably, —R10 of formula (IIa-ii) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R10 of formula (IIa-ii) is methyl.
  • Preferably, —R11 of formula (IIa-ii) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R11 of formula (IIa-ii) is —H.
  • Preferably, —R11 of formula (IIa-ii) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • In an even more preferred embodiment the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIa-ii′):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00018
      • wherein
      • wherein the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond;
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to -L2-;
      • —R3, —R3a, —R10 and —X2— are used as defined in formula (II); and
      • wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIa-ii′) is not replaced by a substituent.
  • It is understood that in case one of —R3, —R3a of formula (IIa-ii′) or both are other than —H they are connected to N to which they are attached through a sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIa-ii′) is not further substituted.
  • Preferably, —X2— of formula (IIa-ii′) is —C(R8R8a)—.
  • Preferably —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIa-ii′) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIa-ii′) is —H. Even more preferably both —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIa-ii′) are —H.
  • Preferably, —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIa-ii′) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIa-ii′) is methyl.
  • Preferably, —R3 of formula (IIa-ii′) is —H and —R3a of formula (IIa-ii′) is methyl.
  • Preferably, —R10 of formula (IIa-ii′) is selected from —H, methyl and ethyl. Most preferably —R10 of formula (IIa-ii′) is methyl.
  • Even more preferably the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIa-iii):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00019
      • wherein the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond; and
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIa-iii) is not replaced by -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ or a substituent.
  • It is understood that in case one of —R3, —R3a of formula (IIa-iii) or both are other than —H they are connected to N to which they are attached through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (IIa-iii) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIa-iii) is not further substituted.
  • Most preferably the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIa-iii′):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00020
      • wherein
      • wherein the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond;
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to -L2-; —R2, —R2a, —R3, —R3a and —X2— are used as defined in formula (II); and
      • wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIa-iii′) is not replaced by a substituent.
  • It is understood that in case one of —R3, —R3a of formula (IIa-iii′) or both are other than —H they are connected to N to which they are attached through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIa-iii′) is not further substituted.
  • In another preferred embodiment the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIb-i)
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00021
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond;
      • —R1, —R1a, —R2, —R2a, —R3, —R3a, —R4 and —X2— are used as defined in formula (II); and wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIb-i) is not replaced by -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ or a substituent.
  • It is understood that in case one of —R3, —R3a of formula (IIb-i) or both are other than —H they are connected to N to which they are attached through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (IIb-i) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIb-i) is not further substituted.
  • Preferably, —R1 and —R1a of formula (IIb-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R1 and —R1a of formula (IIb-i) is methyl. Even more preferably both —R1 and —R1a of formula (IIb-i) are methyl.
  • Preferably, —R4 of formula (IIb-i) is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, —R4 of formula (IIb-i) is —H.
  • Preferably, —X2— of formula (IIb-i) is —C(R8R8a)—.
  • Preferably —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIb-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIb-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIb-i) are —H.
  • Preferably, —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIb-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIb-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIb-i) are H.
  • Preferably, —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIb-i) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIb-i) is —H. Even more preferably both —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIb-i) are —H.
  • More preferably the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIb-ii):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00022
      • wherein the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond;
      • —R2, —R2a, —R3, —R3a and —X2— are used as defined in formula (II); and wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIb-ii) is not replaced by -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ or a substituent.
  • It is understood that in case one of —R3, —R3a of formula (IIb-ii) or both are other than —H they are connected to N to which they are attached through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (IIb-ii) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIb-ii) is not further substituted.
      • Preferably, —X2— of formula (IIb-ii) is —C(R8R8a)—.
  • Preferably —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIb-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIb-ii) is —H. Even more preferably both —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIb-ii) are —H.
  • Preferably, —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIb-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIb-ii) is —H. Even more preferably both —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIb-ii) are H.
  • Preferably, —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIb-ii) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Even more preferably at least one of —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIb-ii) is —H. Even more preferably both —R3 and —R3a of formula (IIb-ii) are —H.
  • Even more preferably the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIb-ii′):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00023
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond;
      • —R2, —R2a, —R3a and —X2— are used as defined in formula (II); and wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIb-ii′) is not replaced by -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ or a substituent.
  • It is understood that in case —R3a of formula (IIb-ii′) is other than —H it are connected to N to which it is attached through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIb-ii′) is not further substituted.
  • Preferably, —X2— of formula (IIb-ii′) is —C(R8R8a)—.
  • Preferably —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIb-ii′) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably at least one of —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIb-ii′) is —H. Even more preferably both —R8 and —R8a of formula (IIb-ii′) are —H.
  • Preferably, —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIb-ii′) are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl and ethyl. More preferably, at least one of —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIb-ii′) is —H. Even more preferably both —R2 and —R2a of formula (IIb-ii′) are H.
  • Preferably, —R3a of formula (IIb-ii′) is selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. In one embodiment —R3a of formula (IIb-ii′) is —H.
  • Even more preferably the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIb-iii):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00024
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond; and
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIb-iii) is not replaced by -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ or a substituent.
  • It is understood that in case one of —R3, —R3a of formula (IIb-iii) or both are other than —H they are connected to N to which they are attached through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (IIb-iii) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIb-iii) is not further substituted.
  • Most preferably the moiety -L1- is of formula (IIb-iii′):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00025
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond;
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to -L2-; and
      • wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (IIb-iii′) is not replaced by -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ or a substituent.
  • It is understood that the nitrogen adjacent to the dashed line marked with the asterisk in formula (IIb-iii′) is attached to -L2- through an sp3-hybridized carbon atom.
  • Preferably the moiety -L1- of formula (IIb-iii′) is not further substituted.
  • Another preferred moiety -L1- is disclosed in WO2016/020373A1. Accordingly, in another preferred embodiment the moiety -L1- is of formula (III):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00026
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates attachment to a primary or secondary amine or hydroxyl of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide or ester linkage, respectively;
      • —R1, —R1a, —R2, —R2a, —R3 and —R3a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, —C(R8R8aR8b), —C(═O)R8, —C—N, —C(═NR8)R8a, —CR8(═CR8aR8b), —C≡CR8 and -T;
      • —R4, —R5 and —R5a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, —C(R9R9aR9b) and -T;
      • a1 and a2 are independently of each other 0 or 1;
      • each —R6, —R6a, —R7, —R7a, —R8, —R8a, —R8b, —R9, —R9a, —R9b are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, halogen, —CN, —COOR10, —OR10, —C(O)R10, —C(O)N(R10R10a), —S(O)2N(R10R10a), —S(O)N(R10R10a), —S(O)2R10, —S(O)R10, —N(R10)S(O)2N(R10aR10b), —SR10, —N(R10R10a), —NO2, —OC(O)R10, —N(R10)C(O)R10a, —N(R10)S(O)2R10a, —N(R10)S(O)R10a, —N(R10)C(O)OR10a, —N(R10)C(O)N(R10aR10b), —OC(O)N(R10R10a), -T, C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl; wherein -T, C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —R11, which are the same or different and wherein C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R12)—, —S(O)2N(R12)—, —S(O)N(R12)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(R12)S(O)2N(R12)—, —S—, —N(R12)—, —OC(OR12)(R12a)—, —N(R12)C(O)N(R12a)—, and —OC(O)N(R12)—,
      • each —R10, —R10a, —R10b is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, -T, C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl; wherein -T, C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —R11, which are the same or different and wherein C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R12)—, —S(O)2N(R12)—, —S(O)N(R12)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(R12)S(O)2N(R12a)—, —S—, —N(R12)—, —OC(OR12)(R12a)—, —N(R12)C(O)N(R12a)—, and —OC(O)N(R12)—;
      • each T is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more —R11, which are the same or different;
      • each —R11 is independently of each other selected from halogen, —CN, oxo (═O), —COOR13, —OR13, —C(O)R13, —C(O)N(R13R13a), —S(O)2N(R13R13a), —S(O)N(R13R13a), —S(O)2R13, —S(O)R13, —N(R13)S(O)2N(R13aR13b), —SR13, —N(R13R13a), —NO2, —OC(O)R13, —N(R13)C(O)R13a, —N(R13)S(O)2R13a, —N(R13)S(O)R13a, —N(R13)C(O)OR13a, —N(R13)C(O)N(R13aR13b), —OC(O)N(R13R3a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different;
      • each —R12, —R12a, —R13, —R13a, —R13b is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different;
      • optionally, one or more of the pairs —R1/—R1a, —R2/—R2a, —R3/—R3a, —R6/—R6a, —R7R7a are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3-10 cycloalkyl or a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl;
      • optionally, one or more of the pairs —R1/—R2, —R1/—R3, —R1/—R4, —R1/—R5, —R1R6, —R1/—R7, —R2/—R3, —R2/—R4, —R2/—R5, —R2R6, —R2/—R7, —R3/—R4, —R3/—R5, —R3/—R6, —R3R7, —R4/—R5, —R4/—R6, —R4/—R7, —R5/—R6, —R5R7, —R6R7 are joint together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring A;
      • A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl; naphthyl; indenyl; indanyl; tetralinyl; C3-10 cycloalkyl; 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl; and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl;
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted;
        • wherein
        • -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer;
        • —Z is a water-soluble carrier; and
        • —Z′ is a water-insoluble carrier.
  • The optional further substituents of -L1- of formula (III) are preferably as described above.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (III) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • In one embodiment -L1- of formula (III) is not further substituted.
  • Additional preferred embodiments for -L1- are disclosed in EP1536334B1, WO2009/009712A1, WO2008/034122A1, WO2009/143412A2, WO2011/082368A2, and U.S. Pat. No. 8,618,124B2, which are herewith incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • Additional preferred embodiments for -L1- are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 8,946,405B2 and U.S. Pat. No. 8,754,190B2, which are herewith incorporated by reference in their entirety. Accordingly, a preferred moiety -L1- is of formula (IV):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00027
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates attachment to -D which is a PTH moiety and wherein attachment is through a functional group of -D selected from the group consisting of —OH, —SH and —NH2;
      • m is 0 or 1;
      • at least one or both of —R1 and —R2 is/are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —CN, —NO2, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, —C(O)R3, —S(O)R3, —S(O)2R3, and —SR4, one and only one of —R1 and —R2 is selected from the group consisting of —H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, and optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl;
      • —R3 is selected from the group consisting of —H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl, —OR9 and —N(R9)2;
      • —R4 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, and optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl;
      • each —R5 is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenylalkyl, optionally substituted alkynylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl and optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl;
      • —R9 is selected from the group consisting of —H and optionally substituted alkyl;
      • —Y— is absent and —X— is —O— or —S—; or
      • —Y— is —N(Q)CH2— and —X— is —O—;
      • Q is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl and optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl;
      • optionally, —R1 and —R2 may be joined to form a 3 to 8-membered ring; and optionally, both —R9 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a heterocyclic ring;
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted;
        • wherein
        • -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer;
        • —Z is a water-soluble carrier; and
        • —Z′ is a water-insoluble carrier.
  • Only in the context of formula (IV) the terms used have the following meaning:
  • The term “alkyl” as used herein includes linear, branched or cyclic saturated hydrocarbon groups of 1 to 8 carbons, or in some embodiments 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • The term “alkoxy” includes alkyl groups bonded to oxygen, including methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, cyclopropoxy, cyclobutoxy, and similar.
  • The term “alkenyl” includes non-aromatic unsaturated hydrocarbons with carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • The term “alkynyl” includes non-aromatic unsaturated hydrocarbons with carbon-carbon triple bonds.
  • The term “aryl” includes aromatic hydrocarbon groups of 6 to 18 carbons, preferably 6 to 10 carbons, including groups such as phenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl. The term “heteroaryl” includes aromatic rings comprising 3 to 15 carbons containing at least one N, O or S atom, preferably 3 to 7 carbons containing at least one N, O or S atom, including groups such as pyrrolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, quinolyl, indolyl, indenyl, and similar.
  • In some instance, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl moieties may be coupled to the remainder of the molecule through an alkylene linkage. Under those circumstances, the substituent will be referred to as alkenylalkyl, alkynylalkyl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, indicating that an alkylene moiety is between the alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl moiety and the molecule to which the alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl is coupled.
  • The term “halogen” includes bromo, fluoro, chloro and iodo.
  • The term “heterocyclic ring” refers to a 4 to 8 membered aromatic or non-aromatic ring comprising 3 to 7 carbon atoms and at least one N, O, or S atom. Examples are piperidinyl, piperazinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, pyrrolidine, and tetrahydrofuranyl, as well as the exemplary groups provided for the term “heteroaryl” above.
  • When a ring system is optionally substituted, suitable substituents are selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or an additional ring, each optionally further substituted. Optional substituents on any group, including the above, include halo, nitro, cyano, —OR, —SR, —NR2, —OCOR, —NRCOR, —COOR, —CONR2, —SOR, —SO2R, —SONR2, —SO2NR2, wherein each R is independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl or heteroaryl, or two R groups taken together with the atoms to which they are attached form a ring.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (IV) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • An additional preferred embodiment for -L1- is disclosed in WO2013/036857A1, which is herewith incorporated by reference in its entirety. Accordingly, a preferred moiety -L1- is of formula (V):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00028
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates attachment to -D which is a PTH moiety and wherein attachment is through an amine functional group of -D;
      • —R1 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted C1-C6 linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl; optionally substituted aryl; optionally substituted heteroaryl; alkoxy; and —NR52;
      • —R2 is selected from the group consisting of —H; optionally substituted C1-C6 alkyl; optionally substituted aryl; and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
      • —R3 is selected from the group consisting of —H; optionally substituted C1-C6 alkyl; optionally substituted aryl; and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
      • —R4 is selected from the group consisting of —H; optionally substituted C1-C6 alkyl; optionally substituted aryl; and optionally substituted heteroaryl;
      • each —R5 is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H; optionally substituted C1-C6 alkyl; optionally substituted aryl; and optionally substituted heteroaryl; or when taken together two —R5 can be cycloalkyl or cycloheteroalkyl;
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted;
        • wherein
        • -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer;
        • —Z is a water-soluble carrier; and
        • —Z′ is a water-insoluble carrier.
  • Only in the context of formula (V) the terms used have the following meaning:
  • “Alkyl”, “alkenyl”, and “alkynyl” include linear, branched or cyclic hydrocarbon groups of 1-8 carbons or 1-6 carbons or 1-4 carbons wherein alkyl is a saturated hydrocarbon, alkenyl includes one or more carbon-carbon double bonds and alkynyl includes one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds. Unless otherwise specified these contain 1-6 C.
  • “Aryl” includes aromatic hydrocarbon groups of 6-18 carbons, preferably 6-10 carbons, including groups such as phenyl, naphthyl, and anthracene “Heteroaryl” includes aromatic rings comprising 3-15 carbons containing at least one N, O or S atom, preferably 3-7 carbons containing at least one N, O or S atom, including groups such as pyrrolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, quinolyl, indolyl, indenyl, and similar.
  • The term “substituted” means an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group comprising one or more substituent groups in place of one or more hydrogen atoms. Substituents may generally be selected from halogen including F, Cl, Br, and I; lower alkyl including linear, branched, and cyclic; lower haloalkyl including fluoroalkyl, chloroalkyl, bromoalkyl, and iodoalkyl; OH; lower alkoxy including linear, branched, and cyclic; SH; lower alkylthio including linear, branched and cyclic; amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, silyl including alkylsilyl, alkoxysilyl, and arylsilyl; nitro; cyano; carbonyl; carboxylic acid, carboxylic ester, carboxylic amide, aminocarbonyl; aminoacyl; carbamate; urea; thiocarbamate; thiourea; ketene; sulfone; sulfonamide; aryl including phenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl; heteroaryl including 5-member heteroaryls including as pyrrole, imidazole, furan, thiophene, oxazole, thiazole, isoxazole, isothiazole, thiadiazole, triazole, oxadiazole, and tetrazole, 6-member heteroaryls including pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, and fused heteroaryls including benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzimidazole, indole, benzothiazole, benzisoxazole, and benzisothiazole.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (V) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • A further preferred embodiment for -L1- is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,585,837B2, which is herewith incorporated by reference in its entirety. Accordingly, a preferred moiety -L1- is of formula (VI):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00029
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates attachment to -D which is a PTH moiety and wherein attachment is through an amine functional group of -D;
      • R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, aryl, alkaryl, aralkyl, halogen, nitro, —SO3H, —SO2NHR5, amino, ammonium, carboxyl, PO3H2, and OPO3H2;
      • R3, R4, and R5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, and aryl;
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted;
        • wherein
        • -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer;
        • —Z is a water-soluble carrier; and
        • —Z′ is a water-insoluble carrier.
  • Suitable substituents for formulas (VI) are alkyl (such as C1-6 alkyl), alkenyl (such as C2-6 alkenyl), alkynyl (such as C2-6 alkynyl), aryl (such as phenyl), heteroalkyl, heteroalkenyl, heteroalkynyl, heteroaryl (such as aromatic 4 to 7 membered heterocycle) or halogen moieties.
  • Only in the context of formula (VI) the terms used have the following meaning: The terms “alkyl”, “alkoxy”, “alkoxyalkyl”, “aryl”, “alkaryl” and “aralkyl” mean alkyl radicals of 1-8, preferably 1-4 carbon atoms, e.g. methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl and butyl, and aryl radicals of 6-10 carbon atoms, e.g. phenyl and naphthyl. The term “halogen” includes bromo, fluoro, chloro and iodo.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (VI) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • A further preferred embodiment for -L1- is disclosed in WO2002/089789A1, which is herewith incorporated by reference in its entirety. Accordingly, a preferred moiety -L1- is of formula (VII):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00030
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates attachment to -D which is a PTH moiety and wherein attachment is through an amine functional group of -D;
      • L1 is a bifunctional linking group,
      • Y1 and Y2 are independently O, S or NR7;
      • R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 and R7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-6 alkyls, C3-12 branched alkyls, C3-8 cycloalkyls, C1-6 substituted alkyls, C3-8 substituted cycloalkyls, aryls, substituted aryls, aralkyls, C1-6 heteroalkyls, substituted C1-6 heteroalkyls, C1-6 alkoxy, phenoxy, and C1-6 heteroalkoxy;
      • Ar is a moiety which when included in formula (VII) forms a multisubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon or a multi-substituted heterocyclic group;
      • X is a chemical bond or a moiety that is actively transported into a target cell, a hydrophobic moiety, or a combination thereof,
      • y is 0 or 1;
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted;
        • wherein
        • -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer;
        • —Z is a water-soluble carrier; and
        • —Z′ is a water-insoluble carrier.
  • Only in the context of formula (VII) the terms used have the following meaning:
  • The term “alkyl” shall be understood to include, e.g. straight, branched, substituted C1-12 alkyls, including alkoxy, C3-8 cycloalkyls or substituted cycloalkyls, etc.
  • The term “substituted” shall be understood to include adding or replacing one or more atoms contained within a functional group or compounds with one or more different atoms.
  • Substituted alkyls include carboxyalkyls, aminoalkyls, dialkylaminos, hydroxyalkyls and mercaptoalkyls; substituted cycloalkyls include moieties such as 4-chlorocyclohexyl; aryls include moieties such as napthyl; substituted aryls include moieties such as 3-bromo-phenyl; aralkyls include moieties such as toluyl; heteroalkyls include moieties such as ethylthiophene; substituted heteroalkyls include moieties such as 3-methoxythiophone; alkoxy includes moieties such as methoxy; and phenoxy includes moieties such as 3-nitrophenoxy. Halo-shall be understood to include fluoro, chloro, iodo and bromo.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (VII) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z.
  • In another preferred embodiment -L1- comprises a substructure of formula (VIII)
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00031
      • wherein
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond;
      • the unmarked dashed lines indicate attachment to the remainder of -L1-; and
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted;
        • wherein
        • -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer;
        • —Z is a water-soluble carrier; and
        • —Z′ is a water-insoluble carrier.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (VIII) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • In one embodiment -L1- of formula (VIII) is not further substituted.
  • In another preferred embodiment -L1- comprises a substructure of formula (IX)
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00032
      • wherein
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming a carbamate bond;
      • the unmarked dashed lines indicate attachment to the remainder of -L1-; and
      • wherein -L1- is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2-Z′ and wherein -L1- is optionally further substituted;
        • wherein
        • -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer;
        • —Z is a water-soluble carrier; and
        • —Z′ is a water-insoluble carrier.
  • Preferably -L1- of formula (IX) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2-Z′.
  • In one embodiment -L1- of formula (IX) is not further substituted.
  • In the prodrugs for use of the present invention -L2- is a chemical bond or a spacer moiety.
  • In one embodiment -L2- is a chemical bond.
  • In another embodiment -L2- is a spacer moiety.
  • When -L2- is other than a single chemical bond, -L2- is preferably selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Ry1)—, —S(O)2N(Ry1)—, —S(O)N(Ry1)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Ry1)S(O)2N(Ry1a)—, —S—, —N(Ry1)—, —OC(ORy1)(Ry1a)—, —N(Ry1)C(O)N(Ry1a)—, —OC(O)N(Ry1)—, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T-, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —Ry2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-15 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Ry3)—, —S(O)2N(Ry3)—, —S(O)N(Ry3)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Ry3)S(O)2N(Ry3a)—, —S—, —N(Ry3)—, —OC(ORy3)(Ry1a)—, —N(Ry3)C(O)N(Ry3a)—, and —OC(O)N(Ry3)—;
  • —Ry1 and —Ry1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, -T, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —Ry2, which are the same or different, and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Ry4)—, —S(O)2N(Ry4)—, —S(O)N(Ry4)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Ry4)S(O)2N(Ry4a)—, —S—, —N(Ry4)—, —OC(ORy4)(Ry4a)—, —N(Ry4)C(O)N(Ry4a)—, and —OC(O)N(Ry4)—;
  • each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more —Ry2, which are the same or different;
  • each —Ry2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, oxo (═O), —COORy5, —ORy5, —C(O)Ry5, —C(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), —S(O)2N(Ry5Ry5a), —S(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), —S(O)2Ry5, —S(O)Ry5, —N(Ry5)S(O)2N(Ry5aRy5b), —SRy5, —N(Ry5Ry5a), —NO2, —OC(O)Ry5, —N(Ry5)C(O)Ry5a, —N(Ry5)S(O)2Ry5a, —N(Ry5)S(O)Ry5a, —N(Ry5)C(O)ORy5a, —N(Ry5)C(O)N(Ry5aRy5b), —OC(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; and
  • each —Ry3, —Ry3a, —Ry4, —Ry4a, —Ry5, —Ry5a and —Ry5b is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, and C1-6 alkyl, wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • When -L2- is other than a single chemical bond, -L2- is even more preferably selected from -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Ry1)—, —S(O)2N(Ry1)—, —S(O)N(Ry1)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Ry1)S(O)2N(Ry1a)—, —S—, —N(Ry1)—, —OC(ORy1)(Ry1a)—, —N(Ry1)C(O)N(Ry1a)—, —OC(O)N(Ry1)—, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T-, C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —Ry2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Ry3)—, —S(O)2N(Ry3)—, —S(O)N(Ry3)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Ry3)S(O)2N(Ry3a)—, —S—, —N(Ry3)—, —OC(ORy3)(Ry3a)—, —N(Ry3)C(O)N(Ry3a)—, and —OC(O)N(Ry3)—;
  • —Ry1 and —Ry1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, -T, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl; wherein -T, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —Ry2, which are the same or different, and wherein C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Ry4)—, —S(O)2N(Ry4)—, —S(O)N(Ry4)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Ry4)S(O)2N(Ry4a)—, —S—, —N(Ry4)—, —OC(ORy4)(Ry4a)—, —N(Ry4)C(O)N(Ry4a)—, and —OC(O)N(Ry4)—;
  • each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more —Ry2, which are the same or different;
  • —Ry2 is selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, oxo (═O), —COORy5, —ORy5, —C(O)Ry5, —C(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), —S(O)2N(Ry5Ry5a), —S(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), —S(O)2Ry5, —S(O)Ry5, —N(Ry5)S(O)2N(Ry5aRy5b), —SRy5, —N(Ry5Ry5a), —NO2, —OC(O)Ry5, —N(Ry5) C(O)Ry5a, —N(Ry5)S(O)2Ry5a, —N(Ry5)S(O)Ry5a, —N(Ry5)C(O)ORy5a, —N(Ry5)C(O)N(R5aRy5b), —OC(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; and
  • each —Ry3, —Ry3a, —Ry4, —Ry4a, —Ry5, —Ry5a and —Ry5b is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • When -L2- is other than a single chemical bond, -L2- is even more preferably selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Ry1)—, —S(O)2N(Ry1)—, —S(O)N(Ry1)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Ry1)S(O)2N(Ry1a)—, —S—, —N(Ry1)—, —OC(ORy1)(Ry1a)—, —N(Ry1)C(O)N(Ry1a)—, —OC(O)N(Ry1)—, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T-, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —Ry2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(Ry3)—, —S(O)2N(Ry3)—, —S(O)N(Ry3)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(Ry3)S(O)2N(Ry3a)—, —S—, —N(Ry3)—, —OC(ORy3)(Ry3a)—, —N(Ry3)C(O)N(Ry3a)—, and —OC(O)N(Ry3)—;
  • —Ry1 and —Ry1a are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, -T, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl;
  • each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl;
  • each —Ry2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, and C1-6 alkyl; and
  • each —Ry3, —Ry3a, —Ry4, —Ry4a, —Ry5, —Ry5a and —Ry5b is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • Even more preferably, -L2- is a C1-20 alkyl chain, which is optionally interrupted by one or more groups independently selected from —O—, -T- and —C(O)N(Ry1)—; and which C1-20 alkyl chain is optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from —OH, -T and —C(O)N(Ry6Ry6a); wherein —Ry1, —Ry6, —Ry6a are independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-4 alkyl and wherein T is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl.
  • Preferably, -L2- has a molecular weight in the range of from 14 g/mol to 750 g/mol.
  • Preferably, -L2- comprises a moiety selected from
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00033
    Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00034
      • wherein
      • dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of -L2-, -L1-, —Z and/or —Z′, respectively; and
      • —R and —Ra are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl.
  • In one preferred embodiment -L2- has a chain lengths of 1 to 20 atoms.
  • As used herein the term “chain length” with regard to the moiety -L2- refers to the number of atoms of -L2- present in the shortest connection between -L1- and —Z.
  • Preferably, -L2- is of formula (i)
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00035
      • wherein
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to -L1-;
      • the unmarked dashed line indicates attachment to —Z or —Z′;
      • n is selected from the group consisting of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18; and
      • wherein the moiety of formula (i) is optionally further substituted.
  • Preferably, n of formula (i) is selected from the group consisting of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9. Even more preferably n of formula (i) is 4, 5, 6, or 7. In one embodiment n of formula (i) is 4. In another embodiment n of formula (i) is 5. In another embodiment n of formula (i) is 6.
  • In another preferred embodiment the moiety -L1-L2- is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00036
      • wherein
      • the unmarked dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond; and
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to —Z or —Z′.
  • In one preferred embodiment the moiety -L1-L2- is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00037
      • wherein
      • the unmarked dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond; and
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to —Z or —Z′.
  • In a preferred embodiment the moiety -L1-L2- is of formula (IIca-ii).
  • In another preferred embodiment the moiety -L1-L2- is of formula (IIcb-iii).
  • Preferably, the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention is of formula (Ia) with x=1.
  • The carrier —Z comprises a C8-24 alkyl or a polymer. Preferably, —Z comprises a polymer, preferably a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-oxazolines), poly(hydroxymethacrylates), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamides), poly(hydroxypropyl methacrylates), poly(hydroxypropyloxazolines), poly(iminocarbonates), poly(lactic acids), poly(lactic-co-glycolic acids), poly(methacrylamides), poly(methacrylates), poly(methyloxazolines), poly(organophosphazenes), poly(ortho esters), poly(oxazolines), poly(propylene glycols), poly(siloxanes), poly(urethanes), poly(vinyl alcohols), poly(vinyl amines), poly(vinylmethylethers), poly(vinylpyrrolidones), silicones, celluloses, carbomethyl celluloses, hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses, chitins, chitosans, dextrans, dextrins, gelatins, hyaluronic acids and derivatives, functionalized hyaluronic acids, mannans, pectins, rhamnogalacturonans, starches, hydroxyalkyl starches, hydroxyethyl starches and other carbohydrate-based polymers, xylans, and copolymers thereof.
  • Preferably, —Z has a molecular weight ranging from 5 to 200 kDa. Even more preferably, —Z has a molecular weight ranging from 8 to 100 kDa, even more preferably ranging from 10 to 80 kDa, even more preferably from 12 to 60, even more preferably from 15 to 40 and most preferably —Z has a molecular weight of about 20 kDa. In another equally preferred embodiment —Z has a molecular weight of about 40 kDa.
  • In one embodiment such water-soluble carrier —Z comprises a protein. Preferred proteins are selected from the group consisting of carboxyl-terminal polypeptide of the chorionic gonadotropin as described in US 2012/0035101 A1 which are herewith incorporated by reference; albumin; XTEN sequences as described in WO 2011123813 A2 which are herewith incorporated by reference; proline/alanine random coil sequences as described in WO 2011/144756 A1 which are herewith incorporated by reference; proline/alanine/serine random coil sequences as described in WO 2008/155134 A1 and WO 2013/024049 A1 which are herewith incorporated by reference; and Fe fusion proteins.
  • In one embodiment —Z is a polysarcosine.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z comprises a poly(N-methylglycine).
  • In a particularly preferred embodiment —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety.
  • In one preferred embodiment —Z comprises one random coil protein moiety.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z comprises two random coil proteins moieties.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z comprises three random coil proteins moieties.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z comprises four random coil proteins moieties.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z comprises five random coil proteins moieties.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z comprises six random coil proteins moieties.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z comprises seven random coil proteins moieties.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z comprises eight random coil proteins moieties.
  • Preferably such random coil protein moiety comprises at least 25 amino acid residues and at most 2000 amino acids. Even more preferably such random coil protein moiety comprises at least 30 amino acid residues and at most 1500 amino acid residues. Even more preferably such random coil protein moiety comprises at least 50 amino acid residues and at most 500 amino acid residues.
  • In a preferred embodiment, —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from alanine and proline. Even more preferably, at least 10%, but less than 75%, preferably less than 65%, of the total number of amino acid residues of such random coil protein moiety are proline residues.
  • Preferably, such random coil protein moiety is as described in WO 2011/144756 A1 which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Even more preferably —Z comprises at least one moiety selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:1, SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:3, SEQ ID NO:4, SEQ ID NO:5, SEQ ID NO:6, SEQ ID NO:7, SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO:9, SEQ ID NO:10, SEQ ID NO:11, SEQ ID NO:12, SEQ ID NO:13, SEQ ID NO:14, SEQ ID NO:15, SEQ ID NO:16, SEQ ID NO:17, SEQ ID NO:51 and SEQ ID NO:61 as disclosed in WO2011/144756 which are hereby incorporated by reference. A moiety comprising such random coil protein comprising alanine and proline will be referred to as “PA” or “PA moiety”.
  • Accordingly, —Z comprises a PA moiety.
  • In an equally preferred embodiment, —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from alanine, serine and proline. Even more preferably, at least 4%, but less than 40% of the total number of amino acid residues of such random coil protein moiety are proline residues. Preferably, such random coil protein moiety is as described in WO 2008/155134 A1 which is herby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Even more preferably —Z comprises at least one moiety selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:2, SEQ ID NO:4, SEQ ID NO:6, SEQ ID NO:8, SEQ ID NO:10, SEQ ID NO:12, SEQ ID NO:14, SEQ ID NO:16, SEQ ID NO:18, SEQ ID NO:20, SEQ ID NO:22, SEQ ID NO:24, SEQ ID NO:26, SEQ ID NO:28, SEQ ID NO:30, SEQ ID NO:32, SEQ ID NO:34, SEQ ID NO:36, SEQ ID NO:40, SEQ ID NO:42, SEQ ID NO:44, SEQ ID NO:46, SEQ ID NO:50, SEQ ID NO:52, SEQ ID NO:54 and SEQ ID NO:56 as disclosed in WO 2008/155134 A1, which are hereby incorporated by reference. A moiety comprising such random coil protein moiety comprising alanine, serine and proline will be referred to as “PAS” or “PAS moiety”.
  • Accordingly, —Z comprises a PAS moiety.
  • In an equally preferred embodiment, —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from alanine, glycine and proline. A moiety comprising such random coil protein moiety comprising alanine, glycine and proline will be referred to as “PAG” or “PAG moiety”.
  • Accordingly, —Z comprises a PAG moiety.
  • In an equally preferred embodiment, —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from proline and glycine. A moiety comprising such random coil protein moiety comprising proline and glycine will be referred to as “PG” or “PG moiety”.
  • Preferably, such PG moiety comprises a moiety of formula (a-0)
  • [(Gly)p-Pro-(Gly)q]r (a-0);
      • wherein
      • p is selected from the group consisting of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5;
      • q is selected from the group consisting of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5;
      • r is an integer ranging from and including 10 to 1000;
      • provided that at least one of p and q is at least 1;
  • Preferably, p of formula (a-0) is selected from the group consisting of 1, 2 and 3.
  • Preferably, q of formula (a-0) is selected from 0, 1 and 2.
  • Even more preferably the PG moiety comprises the sequence of SEQ ID NO:122:
  • GGPGGPGPGGPGGPGPGGPG
  • Even more preferably, the PG moiety comprises the sequence of formula (a-0-a)
  • (GGPGGPGPGGPGGPGPGGPG)v (a-0-a),
      • wherein
      • v is an integer ranging from and including 1 to 50.
  • It is understood that the sequence of formula (a-0-a) comprises v replicates of the sequence of SEQ ID NO:122.
  • Accordingly, —Z comprises a PG moiety.
  • In an equally preferred embodiment, —Z comprises a random coil protein moiety of which at least 80%, preferably at least 85%, even more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, even more preferably at least 98% and most preferably at least 99% of the total number of amino acids forming said random coil protein moiety are selected from alanine, glycine, serine, threonine, glutamate and proline. Preferably, such random coil protein moiety is as described in WO 2010/091122 A1 which is hereby incorporated by reference. Even more preferably —Z comprises at least one moiety selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NO:182, SEQ ID NO:183, SEQ ID NO:184; SEQ ID NO:185, SEQ ID NO:186, SEQ ID NO:187, SEQ ID NO:188, SEQ ID NO:189, SEQ ID NO:190, SEQ ID NO:191, SEQ ID NO:192, SEQ ID NO:193, SEQ ID NO:194, SEQ ID NO:195, SEQ ID NO:196, SEQ ID NO:197, SEQ ID NO:198, SEQ ID NO:199, SEQ ID NO:200, SEQ ID NO:201, SEQ ID NO:202, SEQ ID NO:203, SEQ ID NO:204, SEQ ID NO:205, SEQ ID NO:206, SEQ ID NO:207, SEQ ID NO:208, SEQ ID NO:209, SEQ ID NO:210, SEQ ID NO:211, SEQ ID NO:212, SEQ ID NO:213, SEQ ID NO:214, SEQ ID NO:215, SEQ ID NO:216, SEQ ID NO:217, SEQ ID NO:218, SEQ ID NO:219, SEQ ID NO:220, SEQ ID NO:221, SEQ ID NO:759, SEQ ID NO:760, SEQ ID NO:761, SEQ ID NO:762, SEQ ID NO:763, SEQ ID NO:764, SEQ ID NO:765, SEQ ID NO:766, SEQ ID NO:767, SEQ ID NO:768, SEQ ID NO:769, SEQ ID NO:770, SEQ ID NO:771, SEQ ID NO:772, SEQ ID NO:773, SEQ ID NO:774, SEQ ID NO:775, SEQ ID NO:776, SEQ ID NO:777, SEQ ID NO:778, SEQ ID NO:779, SEQ ID NO:1715, SEQ ID NO:1716, SEQ ID NO:1718, SEQ ID NO:1719, SEQ ID NO:1720, SEQ ID NO:1721 and SEQ ID NO:1722 as disclosed in WO2010/091122A1, which are hereby incorporated by reference. A moiety comprising such random coil protein moiety comprising alanine, glycine, serine, threonine, glutamate and proline will be referred to as “XTEN” or “XTEN moiety” in line with its designation in WO 2010/091122 A1.
  • Accordingly, —Z comprises an XTEN moiety.
  • In another preferred embodiment, —Z comprises a fatty acid derivate. Preferred fatty acid derivatives are those disclosed in WO 2005/027978 A2 and WO 2014/060512 A1 which are herewith incorporated by reference.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z is a hyaluronic acid-based polymer.
  • In one embodiment —Z is a carrier as disclosed in WO 2012/02047 A1 which is herewith incorporated by reference.
  • In another embodiment —Z is a carrier as disclosed in WO 2013/024048 A1 which is herewith incorporated by reference.
  • In another preferred embodiment —Z is a PEG-based polymer, such as a linear, branched or multi-arm PEG-based polymer.
  • In one embodiment —Z is a linear PEG-based polymer.
  • In another embodiment —Z is a multi-arm PEG-based polymer. Preferably, —Z is a multi-arm PEG-based polymer having at least 4 PEG-based arms.
  • Preferably, such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to a multitude of moieties -L2-L1-D, wherein each moiety -L2-L1-D is preferably connected to the end of an arm, preferably to the end of an arm. Preferably such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16 moieties -L2-L1-D. Even more preferably such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 2, 3, 4, 6 or 8 moieties -L2-L1-D. Even more preferably such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 2, 4 or 6 moieties -L2-L1-D, even more preferably such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 4 or 6 moieties -L2-L1-D, and most preferably such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is connected to 4 moieties -L2-L1-D.
  • Preferably, such multi-arm PEG-based polymer —Z is a multi-arm PEG derivative as, for instance, detailed in the products list of JenKem Technology, USA (accessed by download from http://www.jenkemusa.com/Pages/PEGProducts.aspx on Dec. 18, 2014), such as a 4-arm-PEG derivative, in particular a 4-arm-PEG comprising a pentaerythritol core, an 8-arm-PEG derivative comprising a hexaglycerin core, and an 8-arm-PEG derivative comprising a tripentaerythritol core. More preferably, the water-soluble PEG-based carrier —Z comprises a moiety selected from:
      • a 4-arm PEG Amine comprising a pentaerythritol core:
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00038
      • with n ranging from 20 to 500;
      • an 8-arm PEG Amine comprising a hexaglycerin core:
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00039
      • with n ranging from 20 to 500; and
      • R=hexaglycerin or tripentaerythritol core structure; and
      • a 6-arm PEG Amine comprising a sorbitol or dipentaerythritol core:
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00040
      • with n ranging from 20 to 500; and
      • R=comprising a sorbitol or dipentaerythritol core;
      • and wherein dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of the PTH prodrug.
  • In a preferred embodiment —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer. In one embodiment —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having one, two, three, four, five or six branching points.
  • Preferably, —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having one, two or three branching points. In one embodiment —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having one branching point. In another embodiment —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having two branching points. In another embodiment —Z is a branched PEG-based polymer having three branching points.
  • A branching point is preferably selected from the group consisting of —N<, —CH< and >C<.
  • Preferably, such branched PEG-based moiety —Z has a molecular weight of at least 10 kDa.
  • In one embodiment such branched moiety —Z has a molecular weight ranging from and including 10 kDa to 500 kDa, more preferably ranging from and including 10 kDa to 250 Da, even more preferably ranging from and including 10 kDa to 150 kDa, even more preferably ranging from and including 12 kDa to 100 kDa and most preferably ranging from and including 15 kDa to 80 kDa.
  • Preferably, such branched moiety —Z has a molecular weight ranging from and including 10 kDa to 80 kDa. In one embodiment the molecular weight is about 10 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such branched moiety —Z is about 20 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such branched moiety —Z is about 30 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 40 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 50 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 60 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 70 kDa. In another embodiment the molecular weight of such a branched moiety —Z is about 80 kDa. Most preferably, such branched moiety —Z has a molecular weight of about 40 kDa.
  • Preferably, —Z or —Z′ comprises a moiety
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00041
  • In an equally preferred embodiment —Z comprises an amide bond.
  • Preferably —Z comprises a moiety of formula (a)
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00042
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2- or to the remainder of —Z;
      • BPa is a branching point selected from the group consisting of —N<, —CR< and >C<;
      • —R is selected from the group consisting of —H and C1-6 alkyl;
      • a is 0 if BPa is —N< or —CR< and n is 1 if BPa is >C<;
      • —Sa—, Sa′, Sa″— and —Sa′″— are independently of each other a chemical bond or are selected from the group consisting of C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more —R1, which are the same or different and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R2)—, —S(O)2N(R2)—, —S(O)N(R2)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(R2)S(O)2N(R2a)—, —S—, —N(R2)—, —OC(OR2)(R2a)—, —N(R2)C(O)N(R2a)—, and —OC(O)N(R2)—;
      • each -T- is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl; wherein each -T- is independently optionally substituted with one or more —R1, which are the same or different;
      • each —R1 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, oxo (═O), —COOR3, —OR3, —C(O)R3, —C(O)N(R3R3a), —S(O)2N(R3R3a), —S(O)N(R3R3a), —S(O)2R3, —S(O)R3, —N(R3)S(O)2N(R3aR3b), —SR3, —N(R3R3a), —NO2, —OC(O)R3, —N(R3)C(O)R3a, —N(R3)S(O)2R3a, —N(R3)S(O)R3a, —N(R3)C(O)OR3a, —N(R3)C(O)N(R3aR3b), —OC(O)N(R3R3a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; each —R2, —R2a, —R3, —R3a and —R3b is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, and C1-6 alkyl, wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; and
      • Pa′, Pa″ and —Pa′″ are independently a polymeric moiety.
  • In one embodiment BPa of formula (a) is —N<.
  • In another embodiment BPa of formula (a) is >C<.
  • In a preferred embodiment BPa of formula (a) is —CR<. Preferably, —R is —H. Accordingly, a of formula (a) is 0.
  • In one embodiment —Sa— of formula (a) is a chemical bond.
  • In another embodiment —Sa— of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl and C2-10 alkynyl, which C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R4)—, —S(O)2N(R4)—, —S(O)N(R4)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(R4)S(O)2N(R4a)—, —S—, —N(R4)—, —OC(OR4)(R4a)—, —N(R4)C(O)N(R4a)—, and —OC(O)N(R4)—; wherein -T- is a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl; and —R4 and —R4a are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl.
  • Preferably —Sa— of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C1-10 alkyl which is interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, —C(O)N(R4)— and —O—.
  • In one embodiment —Sa′— of formula (a) is a chemical bond.
  • In another embodiment —Sa′— of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl and C2-10 alkynyl, which C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R4)—, —S(O)2N(R4)—, —S(O)N(R4)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(R4)S(O)2N(R4a)—, —S—, —N(R4)—, —OC(OR4)(R4a)—, —N(R4)C(O)N(R4a)—, and —OC(O)N(R4)—; wherein —R4 and —R4a are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Preferably —Sa′— of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, which are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —C(O)— and —C(O)N(R4)—.
  • In one embodiment —Sa″— of formula (a) is a chemical bond.
  • In another embodiment —Sa″— of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl and C2-10 alkynyl, which C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R4)—, —S(O)2N(R4)—, —S(O)N(R4)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(R4)S(O)2N(R4a)—, —S—, —N(R4)—, —OC(OR4)(R4a)—, —N(R4)C(O)N(R4a)—, and —OC(O)N(R4)—; wherein —R4 and —R4a are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Preferably —Sa″— of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, which are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —C(O)— and —C(O)N(R4)—.
  • In one embodiment —Sa′″— of formula (a) is a chemical bond.
  • In another embodiment —Sa′″— of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl and C2-10 alkynyl, which C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —C(O)O—, —O—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R4)—, —S(O)2N(R4)—, —S(O)N(R4)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)—, —N(R4)S(O)2N(R4a)—, —S—, —N(R4)—, —OC(OR4)(R4a)—, —N(R4)C(O)N(R4a)—, and —OC(O)N(R4)—; wherein —R4 and —R4a are independently selected from the group consisting of —H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. Preferably —Sa′″— of formula (a) is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, which are optionally interrupted by one or more chemical groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —C(O)— and —C(O)N(R4)—.
  • Preferably, —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) independently comprise a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-oxazolines), poly(hydroxymethacrylates), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamides), poly(hydroxypropyl methacrylates), poly(hydroxypropyloxazolines), poly(iminocarbonates), poly(lactic acids), poly(lactic-co-glycolic acids), poly(methacrylamides), poly(methacrylates), poly(methyloxazolines), poly(organophosphazenes), poly(ortho esters), poly(oxazolines), poly(propylene glycols), poly(siloxanes), poly(urethanes), poly(vinyl alcohols), poly(vinyl amines), poly(vinylmethylethers), poly(vinylpyrrolidones), silicones, celluloses, carbomethyl celluloses, hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses, chitins, chitosans, dextrans, dextrins, gelatins, hyaluronic acids and derivatives, functionalized hyaluronic acids, mannans, pectins, rhamnogalacturonans, starches, hydroxyalkyl starches, hydroxyethyl starches and other carbohydrate-based polymers, xylans, and copolymers thereof.
  • More preferably, —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) independently comprise a PEG-based moiety. Even more preferably, —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) independently comprise a PEG-based moiety comprising at least 20% PEG, even more preferably at least 30%, even more preferably at least 40% PEG, even more preferably at least 50% PEG, even more preferably at least 60% PEG, even more preferably at least 70% PEG, even more preferably at least 80% PEG and most preferably at least 90% PEG.
  • Preferably, —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) independently have a molecular weight ranging from and including 5 kDa to 50 kDa, more preferably have a molecular weight ranging from and including 5 kDa to 40 kDa, even more preferably ranging from and including 7.5 kDa to 35 kDa, even more preferably ranging from and 7.5 to 30 kDa, even more preferably ranging from and including 10 to 30 kDa.
  • In one embodiment —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 5 kDa.
  • In another embodiment —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 7.5 kDa.
  • In another embodiment —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 10 kDa.
  • In another embodiment —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 12.5 kDa.
  • In another embodiment —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 15 kDa.
  • In another embodiment —Pa′, —Pa″ and —Pa′″ of formula (a) have a molecular weight of about 20 kDa.
  • In one embodiment —Z comprises one moiety of formula (a).
  • In another embodiment —Z comprises two moieties of formula (a).
  • In another embodiment —Z comprises three moieties of formula (a).
  • Preferably, —Z is a moiety of formula (a).
  • More preferably, —Z comprises a moiety of formula (b)
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00043
      • wherein
      • the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2- or to the remainder of —Z; and
      • m and p are independently of each other an integer ranging from and including 150 to 1000; preferably an integer ranging from and including 150 to 500; more preferably an integer ranging from and including 200 to 500; and most preferably an integer ranging from and including 400 to 500.
  • Preferably, m and p of formula (b) are the same integer.
  • Most preferably m and p of formula (b) are about 450.
  • Preferably, —Z is a moiety of formula (b).
  • The carrier —Z′ is a water-insoluble polymer, even more preferably a hydrogel. Preferably, such hydrogel comprises a polymer selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-oxazolines), poly(hydroxymethacrylates), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamides), poly(hydroxypropyl methacrylates), poly(hydroxypropyloxazolines), poly(iminocarbonates), poly(lactic acids), poly(lactic-co-glycolic acids), poly(methacrylamides), poly(methacrylates), poly(methyloxazolines), poly(organophosphazenes), poly(ortho esters), poly(oxazolines), poly(propylene glycols), poly(siloxanes), poly(urethanes), poly(vinyl alcohols), poly(vinyl amines), poly(vinylmethylethers), poly(vinylpyrrolidones), silicones, celluloses, carbomethyl celluloses, hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses, chitins, chitosans, dextrans, dextrins, gelatins, hyaluronic acids and derivatives, functionalized hyaluronic acids, mannans, pectins, rhamnogalacturonans, starches, hydroxyalkyl starches, hydroxyethyl starches and other carbohydrate-based polymers, xylans, and copolymers thereof.
  • If the carrier —Z′ is a hydrogel, it is preferably a hydrogel comprising PEG or hyaluronic acid.
  • Most preferably such hydrogel comprises PEG.
  • Even more preferably, the carrier —Z′ is a hydrogel as described in WO 2006/003014 A2, WO 2011/012715 A1 or WO 2014/056926 A1, which are herewith incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • In another embodiment —Z′ is a polymer network formed through the physical aggregation of polymer chains, which physical aggregation is preferably caused by hydrogen bonds, crystallization, helix formation or complexation. In one embodiment such polymer network is a thermogelling polymer.
  • If the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention is a prodrug, its total mass is preferably at least 10 kDa, such as at least 12 kDa, such as at least 15 kDa, such as at least 20 kDa or such as at least 30 kDa. If the controlled-release PTH compound is a water-soluble prodrug, its total mass preferably is at most 250 kDa, such as at most 200 kDa, 180 kDa, 150 kDa or 100 kDa. It is understood that no meaningful upper molecular weight limit can be provided in case the controlled-release PTH compound is water-insoluble.
  • In a preferred embodiment the controlled-release PTH compound is of formula (IIe-i):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00044
      • wherein
      • the unmarked dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond; and
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to a moiety
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00045
      • wherein
      • m and p are independently an integer ranging from and including 400 to 500.
  • Preferably, -D is attached to the PTH prodrug of formula (IIe-i) through the N-terminal amine functional group of the PTH moiety.
  • In another preferred embodiment the PTH prodrug for use of the present invention is of formula (IIf-i):
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00046
      • wherein
      • the unmarked dashed line indicates the attachment to a nitrogen of -D which is a PTH moiety by forming an amide bond; and
      • the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to a moiety
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00047
      • wherein
      • m and p are independently an integer ranging from and including 400 to 500.
  • Preferably, -D is attached to the PTH prodrug of formula (IIf-i) through the N-terminal amine functional group of the PTH moiety.
  • In a preferred embodiment the residual activity of the controlled-release PTH in the form of a PTH prodrug is less than 10%, more preferably less than 1%, even more preferably less than 0.1%, even more preferably less than 0.01%, even more preferably less than 0.001% and most preferably less than 0.0001%.
  • As used herein the term “residual activity” refers to the activity exhibited by the PTH prodrug with the PTH moiety bound to a carrier in relation to the activity exhibited by the corresponding free PTH. In this context the term “activity” refers to binding to an activation domain of the PTH/PTHrP1 receptor resulting in activation of adenylate cyclase to generate cAMP, phospholipase C to generate intracellular calcium, or osteoblastic expression of RANKL (which binds to RANK (Receptor Activator of Nuclear Factor kB) on osteoclasts. It is understood that measuring the residual activity of the PTH prodrug for use of the present invention takes time during which a certain amount of PTH will be released from the PTH prodrug and that such released PTH may distort the results measured for the PTH prodrug. It is thus accepted practice to test the residual activity of a prodrug with a conjugate in which the drug moiety, in this case PTH, is non-reversibly, i.e. stably, bound to a carrier, which as closely as possible resembles the structure of the PTH prodrug for which residual activity is to be measured.
  • Preferably, the pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention has a pH ranging from and including pH 3 to pH 8. More preferably, the pharmaceutical composition has a pH ranging from and including pH 4 to pH 6. Most preferably, the pharmaceutical composition has a pH ranging from and including pH 4 to pH 5.
  • In one embodiment the pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention is a liquid or suspension formulation. It is understood that the pharmaceutical composition is a suspension formulation if the controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention is water-insoluble.
  • In another embodiment the pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound for use of the present invention is a dry formulation which is reconstituted before administration to a patient.
  • Such liquid, suspension, dry or reconstituted pharmaceutical composition comprises at least one excipient. Excipients used in parenteral formulations may be categorized as, for example, buffering agents, isotonicity modifiers, preservatives, stabilizers, anti-adsorption agents, oxidation protection agents, viscosifiers/viscosity enhancing agents, or other auxiliary agents. However, in some cases, one excipient may have dual or triple functions. Preferably, the at least one excipient comprised in the pharmaceutical composition for use of the present invention is selected from the group consisting of
      • (i) Buffering agents: physiologically tolerated buffers to maintain pH in a desired range, such as sodium phosphate, bicarbonate, succinate, histidine, citrate and acetate, sulphate, nitrate, chloride, pyruvate; antacids such as Mg(OH)2 or ZnCO3 may be also used;
      • (ii) Isotonicity modifiers: to minimize pain that can result from cell damage due to osmotic pressure differences at the injection depot; glycerin and sodium chloride are examples; effective concentrations can be determined by osmometry using an assumed osmolality of 285-315 mOsmol/kg for serum;
      • (iii) Preservatives and/or antimicrobials: multidose parenteral formulations require the addition of preservatives at a sufficient concentration to minimize risk of patients becoming infected upon injection and corresponding regulatory requirements have been established; typical preservatives include m-cresol, phenol, methylparaben, ethylparaben, propylparaben, butylparaben, chlorobutanol, benzyl alcohol, phenylmercuric nitrate, thimerosol, sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, benzoic acid, chlorocresol, and benzalkonium chloride;
      • (iv) Stabilizers: Stabilisation is achieved by strengthening of the protein-stabilising forces, by destabilisation of the denatured state, or by direct binding of excipients to the protein; stabilizers may be amino acids such as alanine, arginine, aspartic acid, glycine, histidine, lysine, proline, sugars such as glucose, sucrose, trehalose, polyols such as glycerol, mannitol, sorbitol, salts such as potassium phosphate, sodium sulphate, chelating agents such as EDTA, hexaphosphate, ligands such as divalent metal ions (zinc, calcium, etc.), other salts or organic molecules such as phenolic derivatives; in addition, oligomers or polymers such as cyclodextrins, dextran, dendrimers, PEG or PVP or protamine or HSA may be used;
      • (v) Anti-adsorption agents: Mainly ionic or non-ionic surfactants or other proteins or soluble polymers are used to coat or adsorb competitively to the inner surface of the formulation's container; e.g., poloxamer (Pluronic F-68), PEG dodecyl ether (Brij 35), polysorbate 20 and 80, dextran, polyethylene glycol, PEG-polyhistidine, BSA and HSA and gelatins; chosen concentration and type of excipient depends on the effect to be avoided but typically a monolayer of surfactant is formed at the interface just above the CMC value;
      • (vi) Oxidation protection agents: antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, ectoine, methionine, glutathione, monothioglycerol, morin, polyethylenimine (PEI), propyl gallate, and vitamin E; chelating agents such as citric acid, EDTA, hexaphosphate, and thioglycolic acid may also be used;
      • (vii) Viscosifiers or viscosity enhancers: in case of a suspension retard settling of the particles in the vial and syringe and are used in order to facilitate mixing and resuspension of the particles and to make the suspension easier to inject (i.e., low force on the syringe plunger); suitable viscosifiers or viscosity enhancers are, for example, carbomer viscosifiers like Carbopol 940, Carbopol Ultrez 10, cellulose derivatives like hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (hypromellose, HPMC) or diethylaminoethyl cellulose (DEAE or DEAE-C), colloidal magnesium silicate (Veegum) or sodium silicate, hydroxyapatite gel, tricalcium phosphate gel, xanthans, carrageenans like Satia gum UTC 30, aliphatic poly(hydroxy acids), such as poly(D,L- or L-lactic acid) (PLA) and poly(glycolic acid) (PGA) and their copolymers (PLGA), terpolymers of D,L-lactide, glycolide and caprolactone, poloxamers, hydrophilic poly(oxyethylene) blocks and hydrophobic poly(oxypropylene) blocks to make up a triblock of poly(oxyethylene)-poly(oxypropylene)-poly(oxyethylene) (e.g. Pluronic®), polyetherester copolymer, such as a polyethylene glycol terephthalate/polybutylene terephthalate copolymer, sucrose acetate isobutyrate (SAIB), dextran or derivatives thereof, combinations of dextrans and PEG, polydimethylsiloxane, collagen, chitosan, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) and derivatives, polyalkylimides, poly (acrylamide-co-diallyldimethyl ammonium (DADMA)), polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), glycosaminoglycans (GAGs) such as dermatan sulfate, chondroitin sulfate, keratan sulfate, heparin, heparan sulfate, hyaluronan, ABA triblock or AB block copolymers composed of hydrophobic A-blocks, such as polylactide (PLA) or poly(lactide-co-glycolide) (PLGA), and hydrophilic B-blocks, such as polyethylene glycol (PEG) or polyvinyl pyrrolidone; such block copolymers as well as the abovementioned poloxamers may exhibit reverse thermal gelation behavior (fluid state at room temperature to facilitate administration and gel state above sol-gel transition temperature at body temperature after injection);
      • (viii) Spreading or diffusing agent: modifies the permeability of connective tissue through the hydrolysis of components of the extracellular matrix in the intrastitial space such as but not limited to hyaluronic acid, a polysaccharide found in the intercellular space of connective tissue; a spreading agent such as but not limited to hyaluronidase temporarily decreases the viscosity of the extracellular matrix and promotes diffusion of injected drugs; and
      • (ix) Other auxiliary agents: such as wetting agents, viscosity modifiers, antibiotics, hyaluronidase; acids and bases such as hydrochloric acid and sodium hydroxide are auxiliary agents necessary for pH adjustment during manufacture.
  • A further aspect of the present invention is a method of treating, controlling, delaying or preventing in a mammalian patient one or more conditions that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH, comprising the step of administering a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof no more frequent than once every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 administered at the same dosing frequency required to maintain serum calcium within normal levels over a 24 hour period.
  • Preferably, the mammalian patient is a human patient.
  • Preferred embodiments of, for example, the controlled-release PTH compound, the administration frequency, i.e. the time between two injections, mode of administration and dosage are as described above.
  • Preferably, the condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH is selected from the group consisting of hypoparathyroidism, hyperphosphatemia, osteoporosis, fracture repair, osteomalacia, osteomalacia and osteoporosis in patients with hypophosphatasia, steroid-induced osteoporosis, male osteoporosis, arthritis, osteoarthritis, osteogenesis imperfecta, fibrous dysplasia, rheumatoid arthritis, Paget's disease, humoral hypercalcemia associated with malignancy, osteopenia, periodontal disease, bone fracture, alopecia, chemotherapy-induced alopecia, and thrombocytopenia. More preferably, the condition that can be treated, controlled, delayed or prevented with PTH is selected from the group consisting of hypoparathyroidism, hyperphosphatemia, fracture repair, arthritis, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, osteopenia, periodontal disease, bone fracture, alopecia, chemotherapy-induced alopecia, and thrombocytopenia.
  • Most preferably said condition is hypoparathyroidism.
    • EXAMPLES
  • Materials and Methods
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) (SEQ ID NO:51) on TCP resin having Boc protected N-terminus and ivDde protected side chain of Lys26 (synthesized by Fmoc-strategy) was obtained from custom peptide synthesis providers.
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) on TCP resin having Fmoc protected N-terminus (synthesized by Fmoc-strategy) was obtained from custom peptide synthesis providers.
  • PEG 2×20 kDa maleimide, Sunbright GL2-400MA was purchased from NOF Europe N.V., Grobbendonk, Belgium. S-Trityl-6-mercaptohexanoic acid was purchased from Polypeptide, Strasbourg, France. HATU was obtained from Merck Biosciences GmbH, Schwalbach/Ts, Germany. Fmoc-N-Me-Asp(OBn)-OH was obtained from Peptide International Inc., Louisville, KY, USA. Fmoc-Aib-OH was purchased from Iris Biotech GmbH, Marktredwitz, Germany. All other chemicals and reagents were purchased from Sigma Aldrich GmbH, Taufkirchen, Germany, unless a different supplier is mentioned.
  • Compound 11a (examples 11-15) was synthesized following the procedure described in patent WO29095479A2, example 1.
  • Syringes equipped with polyethylenene frits (MultiSynTech GmbH, Witten, Germany) were used as reaction vessels or for washing steps of peptide resins.
  • General procedure for the removal of ivDde protecting group from side chain protected PTH on resin: The resin was pre-swollen in DMF for 30 min and the solvent was discarded. The ivDde group was removed by incubating the resin with DMF/hydrazine hydrate 4/1 (v/v, 2.5 mL/g resin) for 8×15 min. For each step fresh DMF/hydrazine hydrate solution was used. Finally, the resin was washed with DMF (10×), DCM (10×) and dried in vacuo.
  • General procedure for the removal of Fmoc protecting group from protected PTH on resin: The resin was pre-swollen in DMF for 30 min and the solvent was discarded. The Fmoc group was removed by incubating the resin with DMF/piperidine/DBU 96/2/2 (v/v/v, 2.5 mL/g resin) for 3×10 min. For each step fresh DMF/piperidine/DBU hsolution was used. Finally, the resin was washed with DMF (10×), DCM (10×) and dried in vacuo.
  • RP-HPLC Purification:
  • For preparative RP-HPLC a Waters 600 controller and a 2487 Dual Absorbance Detector was used, equipped with the following columns: Waters XBridge™ BEH300 Prep C18 5 μm, 150×10 mm, flow rate 6 mL/min, or Waters XBridge™ BEH300 Prep C18 10 μm, 150×30 mm, flow rate 40 mL/min. Linear gradients of solvent system A (water containing 0.1% TFA v/v) and solvent system B (acetonitrile containing 0.1% TFA v/v) were used. HPLC fractions containing product were pooled and lyophilized if not stated otherwise.
  • Flash Chromatography:
  • Flash chromatography purifications were performed on an Isolera One system from Biotage AB, Sweden, using Biotage KP-Sil silica cartridges and n-heptane and ethyl acetate as eluents. Products were detected at 254 nm.
  • Ion Exchange Chromatography:
  • Ion exchange chromatography (IEX) was performed using an Amersham Bioscience AEKTAbasic system equipped with a MacroCap SP cation exchanger column (Amersham Bioscience/GE Healthcare). 17 mM acetic acid pH 4.5 (solvent A) and 17 mM acetic acid, 1 M NaCl, pH 4.5 (solvent B) were used as mobile phases.
  • Size Exclusion Chromatography:
  • Size exclusion chromatography (SEC) was performed using an Amersham Bioscience AEKTAbasic system equipped with HiPrep 26/10 desalting columns (Amersham Bioscience/GE Healthcare). 0.1% (v/v) acetic acid was used as mobile phase.
  • Analytical Methods
  • Analytical ultra-performance LC (UPLC)-MS was performed on a Waters Acquity system equipped with a Waters BEH300 C18 column (2.1×50 mm, 1.7 μm particle size, flow: 0.25 mL/min; solvent A: water containing 0.04% TFA (v/v), solvent B: acetonitrile containing 0.05% TFA (v/v)) coupled to a LTQ Orbitrap Discovery mass spectrometer from Thermo Scientific or coupled to a Waters Micromass ZQ.
  • Quantitative measurements of scrum calcium (sCa), urinary calcium and scrum phosporous (sP) were performed on a Roche-Hitachi P800 modular biochemistry instrument.
    • Example 1 Synthesis of Linker Reagent 1f
  • Linker reagent 1f was synthesized according to the following scheme:
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00048
  • To a solution of N-methyl-N-Boc-ethylenediamine (2 g, 11.48 mmol) and NaCNBH3 (819 mg, 12.63 mmol) in MeOH (20 mL) was added 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzaldehyde (2.08 g, 10.61 mmol) portion wise. The mixture was stirred at rt for 90 min, acidified with 3 M HCl (4 mL) and stirred further 15 min. The reaction mixture was added to saturated NaHCO3 solution (200 mL) and extracted 5× with DCM. The combined organic phases were dried over Na2SO4 and the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The resulting N-methyl-N-Boc-N′-Tmob-ethylenediamine 1a was dried in high vacuum and used in the next reaction step without further purification.
  • Yield: 3.76 g (11.48 mmol, 89% purity, 1a: double Tmob protected product=8:1)
  • MS: m/z 355.22=[M+H]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=354.21).
  • To a solution of 1a (2 g, 5.65 mmol) in DCM (24 mL) COMU (4.84 g, 11.3 mmol), N-Fmoc-N-Me-Asp(OBn)-OH (2.08 g, 4.52 mmol) and 2,4,6-collidine (2.65 mL, 20.34 mmol) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h at rt, diluted with DCM (250 mL) and washed 3× with 0.1 M H2SO4 (100 mL) and 3× with brine (100 mL). The aqueous phases were re-extracted with DCM (100 mL). The combined organic phases were dried over Na2SO4, filtrated and the residue concentrated to a volume of 24 mL. 1b was purified using flash chromatography.
  • Yield: 5.31 g (148%, 6.66 mmol)
  • MS: m/z 796.38=[M+H]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=795.37).
  • To a solution of 1b (5.31 g, max. 4.52 mmol ref. to N-Fmoc-N-Me-Asp(OBn)-OH) in THF (60 mL) DBU (1.8 mL, 3% v/v) was added. The solution was stirred for 12 min at rt, diluted with DCM (400 mL) and washed 3× with 0.1 M H2SO4 (150 mL) and 3× with brine (150 mL). The aqueous phases were re-extracted with DCM (100 mL). The combined organic phases were dried over Na2SO4 and filtrated. 1c was isolated upon evaporation of the solvent and used in the next reaction without further purification.
  • MS: m/z 574.31=[M+H]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=573.30). 1c (5.31 g, 4.52 mmol, crude) was dissolved in acetonitrile (26 mL) and COMU (3.87 g, 9.04 mmol), 6-tritylmercaptohexanoic acid (2.12 g, 5.42 mmol) and 2,4,6-collidine (2.35 mL, 18.08 mmol) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 4 h at rt, diluted with DCM (400 mL) and washed 3× with 0.1 M H2SO4 (100 mL) and 3× with brine (100 mL). The aqueous phases were re-extracted with DCM (100 mL). The combined organic phases were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and 1d was isolated upon evaporation of the solvent. Product 1d was purified using flash chromatography.
  • Yield: 2.63 g (62%, 94% purity)
  • MS: m/z 856.41=[M+H]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=855.41).
  • To a solution of 1d (2.63 g, 2.78 mmol) in i-PrOH (33 mL) and H2O (11 mL) was added LiOH (267 mg, 11.12 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 70 min at rt. The mixture was diluted with DCM (200 mL) and washed 3× with 0.1 M H2SO4 (50 mL) and 3× with brine (50 mL). The aqueous phases were re-extracted with DCM (100 mL). The combined organic phases were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and 1e was isolated upon evaporation of the solvent. 1e was purified using flash chromatography.
  • Yield: 2.1 g (88%)
  • MS: m/z 878.4=[M+Na]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=837.40).
  • To a solution of 1e (170 mg, 0.198 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (4 mL) were added DCC (123 mg, 0.59 mmol), and a catalytic amount of DMAP. After 5 min, N-hydroxy-succinimide (114 mg, 0.99 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 1 h. The reaction mixture was filtered, the solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was taken up in 90% acetonitrile plus 0.1% TFA (3.4 mL). The crude mixture was purified by RP-HPLC. Product fractions were neutralized with 0.5 M pH 7.4 phosphate buffer and concentrated. The remaining aqueous phase was extracted with DCM and 1f was isolated upon evaporation of the solvent.
  • Yield: 154 mg (81%)
  • MS: m/z 953.4=[M+H]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=952.43)
    • Example 2 Synthesis of Linker Reagent 2g
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00049
  • 4-Methoxytriphenylmethyl chloride (3.00 g, 9.71 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (20 mL) and added dropwise under stirring to a solution of ethylenediamine 2a (6.5 mL, 97.3 mmol) in DCM (20 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at rt after which it was diluted with diethyl ether (300 mL), washed 3× with brine/0.1 M NaOH 30/1 (v/v) and once with brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4 and 2b was isolated upon evaporation of the solvent.
  • Yield: 3.18 g (98%)
  • Mmt protected intermediate 2b (3.18 g, 9.56 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (30 mL). 6-(Tritylthio)-hexanoic acid (4.48 g, 11.5 mmol), PyBOP (5.67 g, 10.9 mmol) and DIPEA (5.0 mL, 28.6 mmol) were added and the mixture was stirred for 30 min at rt. The solution was diluted with diethyl ether (250 mL), washed 3× with brine/0.1 M NaOH 30/1 (v/v) and once with brine. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed in vacuo. 2c was purified using flash chromatography.
  • Yield: 5.69 g (85%)
  • MS: m/z 705.4=[M+H]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=704.34).
  • Compound 2c (3.19 g, 4.53 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (50 mL), 1 M BH3·THF solution in THF (8.5 mL, 8.5 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for 16 h at rt. More 1 M BH3·THF solution in THF (14 mL, 14.0 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for further 16 h at rt. Methanol (8.5 mL) and N,N′-dimethyl-ethylendiamine (3.00 mL, 27.9 mmol) were added and the mixture was heated under reflux for 3 h. The mixture was allowed to cool down and ethyl acetate (300 mL) was added. The solution was washed 2× with aqueous Na2CO3 and 2× with aqueous NaHCO3. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed in vacuo to obtain 2d.
  • Yield: 3.22 g (103%)
  • MS: m/z 691.4=[M+H]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=690.36).
  • Di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (2.32 g, 10.6 mmol) and DIPEA (3.09 mL, 17.7 mmol) were dissolved in DCM (5 mL) and added to a solution of 2d (2.45 g, 3.55 mmol) in DCM (5 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 min at rt. The solution was concentrated in vacuo and purified by flash chromatography to obtain product 2e.
  • Yield: 2.09 g (74%)
  • MS: m/z 791.4=[M+H]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=790.42).
  • Compound 2e (5.01 g, 6.34 mmol) was dissolved in acetonitrile (80 mL). 0.4 M aqueous HCl (80 mL) followed by acetonitrile (20 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 1 h at rt. The pH was adjusted to pH 5.5 by addition of aqueous 5 M NaOH. The organic solvent was removed in vacuo and the remaining aqueous solution was extracted 4× with DCM. The combined organic phases were dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed in vacuo to obtain product 2f.
  • Yield: 4.77 g (95%)
  • MS: m/z 519.3=[M+H]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=518.30).
  • Compound 2f (5.27 g, 6.65 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (30 mL) and added to a solution of p-nitrophenyl chloroformate (2.01 g, 9.98 mmol) in DCM (25 mL). 2,4,6-trimethylpyridine (4.38 mL, 33.3 mmol) was added and the solution was stirred for 45 min at rt. The solution was concentrated in vacu and purified by flash chromatography to obtain product 2g.
  • Yield: 4.04 g (89%)
  • MS: m/z 706.32=[M+Na]+, (calculated monoisotopic mass=683.30).
    • Example 3 Synthesis of Permanent S1 PTH(1-34) Conjugate 3
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00050
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) on TCP resin having Fmoc protected N-terminus was Fmoc deprotected according to the procedure given in Materials and Methods. A solution of 6-tritylmercaptohexanoic acid (62.5 mg, 160 μmol), PyBOP (80.1 mg, 154 μmol) and DIPEA (53 μL, 306 μmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added to 0.21 g (51 μmol) of the resin. The suspension was agitated for 80 min at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried in vacuo. Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 10 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt. Crude 3 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether (−18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 36 mg (14%), 3*8 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1062.31=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1062.30).
    • Example 4 Synthesis of Permanent K26 PTH(1-34) Conjugate 4
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00051
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) on TCP resin having Boc protected N-terminus and ivDde protected side chain of Lys26 was ivDde deprotected according to the procedure given in Materials and Methods. A solution of 6-tritylmercaptohexanoic acid (107 mg, 273 μmol), PyBOP (141 mg, 273 μmol) and DIPEA (95 μL, 545 μmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added to 0.80 g (90.9 μmol) of the resin. The suspension was agitated for 1 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried in vacuo. Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 6 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt. Crude 4 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether (−18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 40 mg (8%), 4*8 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1062.30=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1062.30).
    • Example 5 Synthesis of Transient S1 PTH(1-34) Conjugate
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00052
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) on TCP resin having Fmoc protected N-terminus was Fmoc deprotected according to the procedure given in Materials and Methods. A solution of Fmoc-Aib-OH (79 mg, 244 μmol), PyBOP (127 mg, 244 μmol) and DIPEA (64 μL, 365 μmol) in DMF (1.5 mL) was added to 0.60 g (61 μmol) of the resin. The suspension was agitated for 16 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF and Fmoc-deprotected as described above. A solution of 2g (167 mg, 244 μmol) and DIPEA (64 μL, 365 μmol) in DMF (1.5 mL) was added to the resin. The suspension was agitated for 24 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried in vacuo. Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 7 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt. Crude 5 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether (−18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 78 mg (24%), 5*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1101.59=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1101.57).
    • Example 6 Synthesis of Transient S1 PTH(1-34) Conjugate 6
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00053
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) on TCP resin having Fmoc protected N-terminus was Fmoc deprotected according to the procedure given in Materials and Methods. A solution of Fmoc-Ala-OH (32 mg, 102 μmol), PyBOP (53 mg, 102 μmol) and DIPEA (27 μL, 152 μmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added to 0.25 g (25 μmol) of the resin. The suspension was shaken for 1 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried under vacuum. Fmoc-deprotection was performed as described above. A solution of 2g (69 mg, 102 μmol) and DIPEA (27 μL, 152 μmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added to the resin. The suspension was agitated for 1.5 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried in vacuo. Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 3 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt. Crude 6 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether (−18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 25 mg (18%), 6*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1098.75=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1098.07).
    • Example 7 Synthesis of Transient S1 PTH(1-34) Conjugate 7
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00054
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) on TCP resin having Fmoc protected N-terminus was Fmoc deprotected according to the procedure given in Materials and Methods. A solution of Fmoc-Ser(Trt)-OH (117 mg, 205 μmol), PyBOP (108 mg, 207 μmol) and DIPEA (53 μL, 305 μmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added to 0.50 g (51 μmol) of the resin. The suspension was agitated for 1 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried under vacuum. Fmoc-deprotection was performed as described above. A solution of 2g (144 mg, 211 μmol) and DIPEA (53 μL, 305 μmol) in DMF (1.8 mL) was added to the resin. The suspension was shaken for 7 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried in vacuo. Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 6 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt. Crude 7 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether (−18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 54 mg (20%), 7*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1102.08=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1102.07).
    • Example 8 Synthesis of Transient S1 PTH(1-34) Conjugate 8
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00055
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) on TCP resin having Fmoc protected N-terminus was Fmoc deprotected according to the procedure given in Materials and Methods. A solution of Fmoc-Leu-OH (36 mg, 102 μmol), PyBOP (53 mg, 102 μmol) and DIPEA (27 μL, 152 μmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added to 0.25 g (25 μmol) of the resin. The suspension was agitated for 1 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried under vacuum. Fmoc-deprotection was performed as described above. A solution of 2g (69 mg, 102 μmol) and DIPEA (27 μL, 152 μmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added to the resin. The suspension was agitated for 1.5 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried in vacuo. Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 3 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt. Crude 8 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether (−18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 31 mg (22%), 8*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1109.32=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1108.58).
    • Example 9 Synthesis of Transient S1 PTH(1-34) Conjugate 9
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00056
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) on TCP resin having Fmoc protected N-terminus was Fmoc deprotected according to the procedure given in Materials and Methods. A solution of 1e (182 mg, 213 μmol), PyBOP (111 mg, 213 μmol) and DIPEA (93 μL, 532 μmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added to 2.00 g (107 μmol) of the resin. The suspension was agitated for 16 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried under vacuum. Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 20 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and agitating the suspension for 1 h at rt. Crude 9 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether (−18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 47 mg (8%), 9*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1108.58=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1108.57).
    • Example 10 Synthesis of Transient K26 PTH(1-34) Conjugate 10
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00057
  • Side chain protected PTH(1-34) on TCP resin having Boc protected N-terminus and ivDde protected side chain of Lys26 was ivDde deprotected according to the procedure given in Materials and Methods. A solution of 1f (867 mg, 910 μmol) and DIPEA (0.24 mL, 1.36 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added to 1.91 g (227 μmol) of the resin. The suspension was agitated for 1 h at rt. The resin was washed 10× with DMF, 10× with DCM and dried under vacuum. Cleavage of the peptide from the resin and removal of protecting groups was achieved by adding 20 mL cleavage cocktail 100/3/3/2/1 (v/w/v/v/v) TFA/DTT/TES/water/thioanisole and shaking the suspension for 1 h at rt. Crude 10 was precipitated in pre-cooled diethyl ether (−18° C.). The precipitate was dissolved in ACN/water and purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 92 mg (7%), 10*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1108.58=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1108.57).
    • Example 11 Synthesis of Low Molecular Weight Transient S1 PEG Conjugate 11b
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00058
  • 0.15 mL of a 0.5 M NaH2PO4 buffer (pH 7.4) was added to 0.5 mL of a 20 mg/mL solution of thiol 5 (10 mg, 1.84 μmol) in 1/1 (v/v) acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% TFA (v/v). The solution was incubated at A for 10 min after which 238 μL of a 10 mg/mL solution of maleimide 11a (2.4 mg, 2.21 μmol) in 1/1 (v/v) acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% TFA (v/v) were added. The solution was incubated for 20 min at rt. 10 μL TFA was added and the mixture was purified by RP-HPLC. The product fractions were freeze-dried to obtain 11b.
  • Yield: 3.1 mg (26%), 11b*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1097.00=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+5H]5+=1096.99).
    • Example 12 Synthesis of Low Molecular Weight Transient S1 PEG Conjugate 12
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00059
  • Conjugate 12 was synthesized as described for 11b by using thiol 6 (10 mg, 1.85 μmol) and maleimide 11a (2.4 mg, 2.21 μmol).
  • Yield: 10 mg (83%), 12*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1094.20=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1094.19).
    • Example 13 Synthesis of Low Molecular Weight Transient S1 PEG Conjugate 13
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00060
  • Conjugate 13 was synthesized as described for 11b by using thiol 7 (10 mg, 1.84 μmol) and maleimide 11a (2.4 mg, 2.21 μmol).
  • Yield: 8 mg (67%), 13*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1097.40=[M+5H]5+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+5H]5+=1097.39).
    • Example 14 Synthesis of Low Molecular Weight Transient S1 PEG Conjugate 14
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00061
  • Conjugate 14 was synthesized as described for 11b by using thiol 8 (10 mg, 1.83 μmol) and maleimide 11a (2.4 mg, 2.21 μmol).
  • Yield: 4 mg (33%), 14*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1378.01=[M+4H]4+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+4H]4+=1378.00).
    • Example 15 Synthesis of Low Molecular Weight Transient K26 PEG Conjugate 15
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00062
  • Conjugate 15 was synthesized as described for 11b by using thiol 10 (5.2 mg, 0.95 μmol) and maleimide 11a (1.23 mg, 1.14 μmol).
  • Yield: 2.1 mg (33%), 15*9 TFA
  • MS: m/z 1102.60=[M+5H]5+, (calculated monoisotopic mass for [M+5H]5+=1102.59).
    • Example 16 Synthesis of Permanent 2×20 kDa S1 PEG Conjugate 16
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00063
  • 772 μL of a solution containing thiol 3 (19.4 mg/mL, 15 mg, 3.54 μmol) and 2.5 mg/mL Boc-L-Met in 1/1 (v/v) acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% TFA (v/v) were added to 1.87 mL of a solution containing PEG 2×20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 187 mg, 4.32 μmol) and 2.5 mg/mL Boc-L-Met in water containing 0.1% TFA (v/v). 0.5 M NaH2PO4 buffer (0.66 mL, pH 7.0) was added and the mixture was stirred for 30 min at rt. 10 μL of a 270 mg/mL solution of 2-mercaptoethanol in water was added. The mixture was stirred for 5 min at rt and 0.33 mL 1 M HCl were added. Conjugate 16 was purified by IEX followed by RP-HPLC using a linear gradient of solvent system A (water containing 0.1% AcOH v/v) and solvent system B (acetonitrile containing 0.1% AcOH v/v). The product containing fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 97 mg (2.01 μmol, 57%) conjugate 16*8 AcOH
    • Example 17 Synthesis of Permanent 2×20 kDa K26 PEG Conjugate 17
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00064
  • Conjugate 17 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 4 (15 mg, 3.53 μmol) and PEG 2×20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 187 mg, 4.32 μmol).
  • Yield: 80 mg (1.79 μmol, 51%) conjugate 17*8 AcOH
    • Example 18 Synthesis of Transient 2×20 kDa S1 PEG Conjugate 18
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00065
  • Conjugate 18 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 5 (37 mg, 8.40 μmol) and PEG 2×20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 445 mg, 9.24 μmol). The reaction was quenched by addition of 50 μL TFA without prior addition of 2-mercaptoethanol. Conjugate 18 was purified by IEX followed by SEC for desalting. The product containing fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 161 mg (3.33 μmol, 40%) conjugate 18*9 AcOH
    • Example 19 Synthesis of Transient 2×20 kDa S1 PEG Conjugate 19
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00066
  • Conjugate 19 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 7 (27 mg, 6.14 μmol) and PEG 2×20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 325 mg, 7.50 μmol).
  • Yield: 249 mg (5.16 μmol, 84%) conjugate 19*9 AcOH
    • Example 20 Synthesis of Transient 2×20 kDa S1 PEG Conjugate 20
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00067
  • Conjugate 20 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 9 (38 mg, 8.59 μmol) and PEG 2×20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 455 mg, 9.45 μmol). The reaction was quenched by addition of 50 μL TFA without prior addition of 2-mercaptoethanol. Conjugate 20 was purified by IEX followed by SEC for desalting. The product containing fractions were freeze-dried.
  • Yield: 194 mg (4.01 μmol, 47%) conjugate 20*9 AcOH
    • Example 21 Synthesis of Transient 2×20 kDa K26 PEG Conjugate 21
  • Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00068
  • Conjugate 21 was prepared as described for 16 by reaction of thiol 10 (34 mg, 7.58 μmol) and PEG 2×20 kDa maleimide (Sunbright GL2-400MA, 401 mg, 9.26 μmol).
  • Yield: 256 mg (5.30 μmol, 70%) conjugate 21*9 AcOH
    • Example 22 Pharmacodynamic Actions in Thyroparathyroidectomised (TPTx) Rats During a 28-Days Study with Daily Subcutaneous Injections with Conjugate 18 or PTH(1-84)
  • This study was performed in order to test and compare the effect of daily subcutaneous injection of compound 18 and PTH(1-84), the current standard of care, in an animal disease model relevant for investigating treatment of hypoparathyroidism (HP). Rats subjected to thyroparathyroidectomy (TPTx) by blunt dissection are unable to produce parathyroid hormone, PTH, the major regulator of calcium homeostasis. Hence, TPTx rats develop hypocalcemia and hyperphosphatemia characteristic of HP. 17 weeks old female SD TPTx rats (n=9/group) were dosed subcutaneously for 28 days with compound 18 (5 μg PTH eq/kg/d; 1.2 nmol/kg/d, in 10 mM succinic acid, 46 g/L mannitol, pH 4.0), PTH(1-84) (70 μg PTH eq/kg/d; 7.3 nmol/kg/d; in 10 mM citrate, mannitol 39.0 g/L, pH 5.0) or vehicle. Additionally, one group of sham operated rats (n=9) representing normophysiological background control were also given vehicle. Serum calcium (sCa) and phosporous (sP) levels in the animals were measured pre- and post-dose on days 1, 6, 12 and 27. Moreover, bone turnover markers (P1NP and CTx) were measured and bone quality assessed by ex vivo pQCT.
  • Results: The average sCa in the TPTx rats pre-dosing at day 1 was 8.3 mg/dL compared to 10.9 mg/dL in the sham operated control rats. The sP values were 8.7 mg/dL and 5.9 mg/dL, respectively. Compound 18 given daily at 1.2 nmol/kg elevated sCa to near-normal levels while lowering sP within a few days of administration. At day 12 (day 5 at steady state with compound 18) sCa had stabilised at normal level (10.7 mg/dL) in this group of animals (compound 18/sham-control ratio=1.01) as opposed to the hypocalceamic level (8.1 mg/dL) measured in the PTH(1-84) treated rats (PTH(1-84)/sham-control ratio=0.76). Additionally, the 24-hour urinary Ca excretion at day 12 was comparable between the animals treated with compound 18 and sham-control. Bone mineral density (BMD) and bone mineral content (BMC) were increased in TPTx controls as seen in HP patients. Treatment with Compound 18 decreased BMD, BMC and area in parallel with an increase in CTx compared to sham and vehicle-treated TPTx animals. A significant increase in trabecular BMD was observed in animals dosed with PTH(1-84) compared to both control groups.
  • It was concluded that compound 18 at a dosage even as low as less than 20% of the molar equivalent of the here tested dose of PTH(1-84) was able to maintain sCa at a level comparable to the sCa level in sham-control animals (here representing normal level) over a 24 hour period. In contrast, PTH(1-84) at a dose of 7.3 nmol/kg/d did not lead to increase in sCa as compared to the levels in the vehicle-injected TPTx rats. However, a minimal decrease in sP was observed in the PTH(1-84) dosed animals confirming exposure and response to PTH(1-84) in the rats. Following the 28-days of treatment with Compound 18, trabecular and cortical BMD in vertebrae were within normal range, whereas an anabolic effect was observed for PTH(1-84) on trabecular and cortical bone in vertebrae.
    • Abbreviations
      • ACN acetonitrile
      • AcOH acetic acid
      • Aib 2-aminoisobutyric acid
      • BMD bone mineral density
      • Bn benzyl
      • Boc tert-butyloxycarbonyl
      • COMU (1-cyano-2-ethoxy-2-oxoethylidenaminooxy)dimethylamino-morpholino-carbenium hexafluorophosphate
      • cAMP cyclic adenosine monophosphate
      • d day
      • DBU 1,3-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undecene
      • DCC N,N′-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
      • DCM dichloromethane
      • DIPEA N,N-diisopropylethylamine
      • DMAP dimethylamino-pyridine
      • DMF N,N-dimethylformamide
      • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
      • DTT dithiothreitol
      • EDTA ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid
      • eq stoichiometric equivalent
      • ESI-MS electrospray ionization mass spectrometry
      • Et ethyl
      • Fmoc 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl
      • Glu-C endoproteinase Glu-C
      • h hour
      • HATU O-(7-azabenzotriazole-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate
      • HP hypoparathyroidism
      • HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
      • ivDde 4,4-dimethyl-2,6-dioxocyclohex-1-ylidene)-3-methylbutyl
      • LC liquid chromatography
      • LTQ linear trap quadrupole
      • Lys-C endoproteinase Lys-C
      • LLOQ lower limit of quantification
      • Mal 3-maleimido propyl
      • Me methyl
      • MeOH methanol
      • min minutes
      • Mmt monomethoxytrityl
      • MS mass spectrum/mass spectrometry
      • m/z mass-to-charge ratio
      • OtBu tert-butyloxy
      • PEG poly(ethylene glycol)
      • pH potentia Hydrogenii
      • PK pharmacokinetics
      • Pr propyl
      • PTH parathyroid hormone
      • PyBOP benzotriazol-1-yl-oxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate
      • Q-TOF quadrupole time-of-flight
      • RP-HPLC reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography
      • rt room temperature
      • sCa serum calcium
      • SIM single ion monitoring
      • SEC size exclusion chromatography
      • se subcutaneous
      • sP serum phosphate
      • t1/2 half life
      • TCP tritylchloride polystyrol
      • TES triethylsilane
      • TFA trifluoroacetic acid
      • THF tetrahydrofuran
      • Tmob 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzyl
      • TPTx thyroparathyroidectomy
      • Trt triphenylmethyl, trityl
      • ULOQ upper limit of quantification
      • UPLC ultra performance liquid chromatography
      • UV ultraviolet
      • ZQ single quadrupole

Claims (10)

1-15. (canceled)
16. A method of treating or controlling hypoparathyroidism in a human patient, comprising the step of administering to the human patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one controlled-release PTH compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof by subcutaneous injection no more frequently than once every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 70% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 administered by subcutaneous injection at the same dosing frequency required to maintain a serum albumin-adjusted calcium level in serum of above 8.5 mg/dL over a 24 hour period and wherein the controlled release PTH compound is of formula:
Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00069
wherein
the unmarked dashed line indicates the attachment to an N-terminal amine group of -D, which is a PTH moiety having the amino sequence of SEQ ID NO:51, by an amide bond; and
the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to a moiety
Figure US20230321198A1-20231012-C00070
wherein
each of m and p is independently an integer from 400 to 500.
17. The method of claim 16, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is administered once every 24 hours.
18-19. (canceled)
20. (canceled)
21. The method of claim 16, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is administered with a pen injector.
22. The method of claim 16, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is administered no more frequent than once every 24 hours with a dosage of the controlled-release PTH compound that corresponds to no more than 60% of the molar equivalent dose of PTH 1-84 administered at the same dosing frequency required to maintain serum-albumin adjusted calcium level in serum of above 8.5 mg/dL over a 24 hour period.
23-27. (canceled)
28. The method of claim 16, wherein the pharmaceutical composition has a pH ranging from and including pH 3 to pH 8.
29-31. (canceled)
US18/176,372 2016-09-29 2023-02-28 Dosage Regimen for a Controlled-Release PTH Compound Pending US20230321198A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/176,372 US20230321198A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2023-02-28 Dosage Regimen for a Controlled-Release PTH Compound

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP16191451 2016-09-29
EP16191451.0 2016-09-29
EP17155843.0 2017-02-13
EP17155843 2017-02-13
PCT/EP2017/074592 WO2018060310A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-09-28 Dosage regimen for a controlled-release pth compound
US201916337713A 2019-03-28 2019-03-28
US18/176,372 US20230321198A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2023-02-28 Dosage Regimen for a Controlled-Release PTH Compound

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2017/074592 Continuation WO2018060310A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-09-28 Dosage regimen for a controlled-release pth compound
US16/337,713 Continuation US11590207B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-09-28 Dosage regimen for a controlled-release PTH compound

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20230321198A1 true US20230321198A1 (en) 2023-10-12

Family

ID=60051488

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/337,713 Active US11590207B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-09-28 Dosage regimen for a controlled-release PTH compound
US18/063,294 Active US11890326B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2022-12-08 Controlled-release PTH compound
US18/176,372 Pending US20230321198A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2023-02-28 Dosage Regimen for a Controlled-Release PTH Compound
US18/355,223 Active US11918628B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2023-07-19 Controlled-release PTH compound

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/337,713 Active US11590207B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2017-09-28 Dosage regimen for a controlled-release PTH compound
US18/063,294 Active US11890326B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2022-12-08 Controlled-release PTH compound

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/355,223 Active US11918628B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2023-07-19 Controlled-release PTH compound

Country Status (23)

Country Link
US (4) US11590207B2 (en)
EP (2) EP3518960B1 (en)
JP (3) JP7197468B2 (en)
KR (2) KR102627405B1 (en)
CN (2) CN109789189B (en)
AU (1) AU2017336249A1 (en)
BR (1) BR112019005533A2 (en)
CA (1) CA3037442A1 (en)
DK (1) DK3518960T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2959995T3 (en)
FI (1) FI3518960T3 (en)
HR (1) HRP20231079T1 (en)
HU (1) HUE063235T2 (en)
IL (2) IL265591B2 (en)
LT (1) LT3518960T (en)
MX (1) MX2019003181A (en)
NZ (1) NZ751969A (en)
PL (1) PL3518960T3 (en)
RS (1) RS64440B1 (en)
SG (1) SG11201901576QA (en)
SI (1) SI3518960T1 (en)
WO (1) WO2018060310A1 (en)
ZA (1) ZA201901811B (en)

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
ES2816009T3 (en) * 2011-12-14 2021-03-31 Univ Arkansas Administration of therapeutic agents by means of a collagen-binding protein
RU2747316C2 (en) * 2016-03-01 2021-05-04 Асцендис Фарма Боун Дизизис А/С Rtn prodrugs
HUE063235T2 (en) 2016-09-29 2024-01-28 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases As Dosage regimen for a controlled-release pth compound
BR112019005793A2 (en) 2016-09-29 2019-06-18 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases As pth compounds with low peak-to-valley ratios
JP7397440B2 (en) 2017-02-10 2023-12-13 ザ ボード オブ トラスティーズ オブ ザ ユニバーシティ オブ アーカンソー Collagen-binding drug composition and method of use thereof
AU2019270464A1 (en) * 2018-05-18 2020-11-19 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases A/S Starting dose of PTH conjugates
CA3129357A1 (en) 2019-02-11 2020-08-20 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases A/S Liquid pharmaceutical formulations of pth conjugates
CN117586372A (en) * 2022-08-10 2024-02-23 成都奥达生物科技有限公司 Long-acting teriparatide compound

Family Cites Families (98)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5744444A (en) 1989-10-27 1998-04-28 Haemopep Pharma Gmbh HPTH-fragment-(1-37), the preparation thereof, medicaments containing same and the use thereof
US5567439A (en) * 1994-06-14 1996-10-22 Fuisz Technologies Ltd. Delivery of controlled-release systems(s)
MY120063A (en) 1997-12-09 2005-08-30 Lilly Co Eli Stabilized teriparatide solutions
US6624142B2 (en) 1997-12-30 2003-09-23 Enzon, Inc. Trimethyl lock based tetrapartate prodrugs
US20050124537A1 (en) * 2000-04-27 2005-06-09 Amgen Inc. Modulators of receptors for parathyroid hormone and parathyroid hormone-related protein
EP1477496A4 (en) 2002-02-01 2006-08-02 Chugai Pharmaceutical Co Ltd Peg-conjugated pth or peg-conjugated pth derivate
US6559293B1 (en) * 2002-02-15 2003-05-06 Transform Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Topiramate sodium trihydrate
US7122189B2 (en) 2002-08-13 2006-10-17 Enzon, Inc. Releasable polymeric conjugates based on aliphatic biodegradable linkers
US7332164B2 (en) 2003-03-21 2008-02-19 Enzon Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterobifunctional polymeric bioconjugates
EP1620118B1 (en) 2003-04-08 2014-06-18 Yeda Research And Development Co., Ltd. Reversible pegylated drugs
US7690003B2 (en) 2003-08-29 2010-03-30 Fuller Jeffrey C System and method for increasing data throughput using thread scheduling
SI2932981T1 (en) 2003-09-19 2021-11-30 Novo Nordisk A/S Albumin-binding derivatives of GLP-1
US8377917B2 (en) 2004-03-23 2013-02-19 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Polymeric prodrug with a self-immolative linker
EP1750756A2 (en) 2004-05-10 2007-02-14 Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc. Compositions and methods for enhanced mucosal delivery of parathyroid hormone
US7968085B2 (en) 2004-07-05 2011-06-28 Ascendis Pharma A/S Hydrogel formulations
CN1597697A (en) 2004-07-19 2005-03-23 中国药科大学 Human parathyrin 1.34 peptide related peptide-Pro-Pro-[Arg11 hPTH (1.34)-Pro-Pro
US20060069021A1 (en) 2004-08-13 2006-03-30 Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc. Compositions and methods for intranasal administration of inactive analogs of PTH or inactivated preparations of PTH or PTH analogs
CA2582255A1 (en) * 2004-08-30 2006-08-08 Lunamed, Inc. 4-phenylbutyric acid controlled-release formulations for therapeutic use
EP1736059A1 (en) 2005-06-21 2006-12-27 Fuji Oil Europe Structuring granular composition
GB2427360A (en) 2005-06-22 2006-12-27 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Aliphatic prodrug linker
CN1298386C (en) 2005-08-31 2007-02-07 上海交通大学 Prepn process of slow release parathyroid hormone microballoon
US8450269B2 (en) 2006-02-03 2013-05-28 Prolor Biotech Ltd. Long-acting growth hormone and methods of producing same
AU2007225056A1 (en) 2006-03-15 2007-09-20 Alza Corporation Apparatus and method for transdermal delivery of parathyroid hormone agents to prevent or treat osteopenia
CN101534643A (en) 2006-09-15 2009-09-16 安佐制药股份有限公司 Hindered ester-based biodegradable linkers for oligonucleotide delivery
SI2084183T1 (en) 2006-10-13 2010-09-30 Lilly Co Eli Pegylated pth as pth receptor modulators and uses thereof
US8101729B2 (en) * 2007-03-19 2012-01-24 Henry Joseph Niemczyk Pegylated amino acid derivatives and the process to synthesize the same
DK3091075T3 (en) 2007-04-09 2018-07-16 Univ Arkansas FUSION PROTEINS OF COLLAGEN-BINDING DOMAIN AND PARATHYRO OIDA HORMON
DK2173890T3 (en) 2007-06-21 2011-06-27 Univ Muenchen Tech Biologically active proteins with increased stability in vivo and / or in vitro
TW200922624A (en) 2007-07-11 2009-06-01 Enzon Pharmaceuticals Inc Polymeric drug delivery system containing a multi-substituted aromatic moiety
US7633977B2 (en) 2007-08-08 2009-12-15 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Multispectral laser with improved time division multiplexing
EP2052736A1 (en) 2007-10-26 2009-04-29 Nycomed Danmark ApS Parathyroid hormone formulations und uses thereof
RU2010136023A (en) * 2008-02-01 2012-03-10 Асцендис Фарма Ас (Dk) A MEDICINE CONTAINING A SELF-DIVISIBLE LINKER
CN102014965B (en) 2008-04-29 2015-11-25 阿森迪斯药物生长障碍股份有限公司 Recombinant human somatropin's compound of PEGization
EP2288261A4 (en) 2008-05-23 2013-09-25 Enzon Pharmaceuticals Inc Polymeric systems containing intracellular releasable disulfide linker for the delivery of oligonucleotides
WO2009156481A1 (en) 2008-06-25 2009-12-30 Ascendis Pharma As Pegylated bnp
WO2010022171A1 (en) 2008-08-19 2010-02-25 Ferring International Center S.A. Peptidic pth receptor agonists
MX2011008094A (en) 2009-02-03 2012-02-13 Amunix Operating Inc Extended recombinant polypeptides and compositions comprising same.
ES2547868T3 (en) 2009-07-16 2015-10-09 Lockheed Martin Corporation Beam arrangements of helical tubes for heat exchangers
SG177761A1 (en) 2009-07-31 2012-03-29 Ascendis Pharma As Biodegradable polyethylene glycol based water-insoluble hydrogels
BR112012001988A2 (en) 2009-07-31 2017-05-09 Sanofi Aventis Deutschland long-acting insulin composition
US20120191039A1 (en) 2009-07-31 2012-07-26 Ascendis Pharma A/S Carrier linked pramipexole prodrugs
WO2011012723A1 (en) * 2009-07-31 2011-02-03 Ascendis Pharma As Injectable sustained release compositions comprising a pramipexole prodrug
EP2459227B1 (en) 2009-07-31 2021-03-17 Ascendis Pharma A/S Prodrugs containing an aromatic amine connected by an amide bond to a carrier
PE20120918A1 (en) 2009-07-31 2012-08-14 Sanofi Aventis Deutschland DEPTH DRUGS THAT INCLUDE AN INSULIN-CONNECTOR CONJUGATE
CA2774608A1 (en) 2009-09-30 2011-04-07 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh A mechanism for a drug delivery device
AR078458A1 (en) 2009-09-30 2011-11-09 Sanofi Aventis Deutschland DRIVE ASSEMBLY, PISTON VASTAGO, DRUG DELIVERY DEVICE, AND USE OF A SPRING
WO2011042450A1 (en) * 2009-10-06 2011-04-14 Ascendis Pharma As Carrier linked paliperidone prodrugs
MX337432B (en) 2009-12-15 2016-03-04 Ascendis Pharma As Dry growth hormone composition transiently linked to a polymer carrier.
US20120289571A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2012-11-15 Enzon Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Polymeric conjugates of aromatic amine containing compounds including releasable urea linker
EP2525831B1 (en) 2010-01-22 2019-05-15 Ascendis Pharma A/S Carrier-linked carbamate prodrug linkers
EP2525829A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2012-11-28 Ascendis Pharma A/S Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aromatic amine-containing drugs
EP2525830B1 (en) 2010-01-22 2016-05-11 Ascendis Pharma A/S Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aliphatic amine-containing drugs
US20110229580A1 (en) * 2010-03-22 2011-09-22 Indian Institute of Technology Bombay, School of Biosciences and Bioengineering Compositions and methods for nano-in-micro particles
WO2011123813A2 (en) 2010-04-02 2011-10-06 Amunix Operating Inc. Binding fusion proteins, binding fusion protein-drug conjugates, xten-drug conjugates and methods of making and using same
ES2584381T3 (en) 2010-05-05 2016-09-27 Prolynx Llc Controlled release of active compounds from macromolecular conjugates
US8946405B2 (en) 2010-05-05 2015-02-03 Prolynx Llc Controlled release from solid supports
MX358161B (en) * 2010-05-13 2018-08-06 The General Hospital Corp Star Parathyroid hormone analogs and uses thereof.
BR112012029577B1 (en) 2010-05-21 2022-04-12 Xl-Protein Gmbh Drug conjugate comprising biosynthetic proline/alanine random helical polypeptides, and pharmaceutical or diagnostic composition
US8865220B2 (en) * 2010-06-14 2014-10-21 Kaohsiung Medical University Method for controlled release of parathyroid hormone from encapsulated poly(lactic-glycolic)acid microspheres
CN102959585B (en) 2010-06-30 2016-03-30 日本电气方案创新株式会社 Attribute determining method, attribute determining device and attribute certainty annuity
US20120040320A1 (en) * 2010-08-13 2012-02-16 Nadeau Daniel A Injection Simulation Device and Methods Thereof
EP2438930A1 (en) 2010-09-17 2012-04-11 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland GmbH Prodrugs comprising an exendin linker conjugate
CN103874480A (en) * 2011-08-12 2014-06-18 阿森迪斯药物股份有限公司 Sustained release composition of prostacyclin
AU2012296950B2 (en) 2011-08-12 2016-09-22 Ascendis Pharma A/S Polymeric hyperbranched carrier-linked prodrugs
AU2012296951B2 (en) 2011-08-12 2016-09-15 Ascendis Pharma A/S Protein carrier-linked prodrugs
AU2012296954B2 (en) 2011-08-12 2016-09-15 Ascendis Pharma A/S Carrier-linked treprostinil prodrugs
US20140249093A1 (en) * 2011-08-12 2014-09-04 Ascendis Pharma A/S Carrier-Linked Prodrugs Having Reversible Carboxylic Ester Linkages
WO2013036857A1 (en) 2011-09-07 2013-03-14 Prolynx Llc Sulfone linkers
CN104010626A (en) 2011-10-12 2014-08-27 阿森迪斯药物眼科部股份有限公司 Prevention and treatment of ocular conditions
DE102011116960B3 (en) 2011-10-26 2012-10-25 Stahlbrandschutz Gmbh Intumescent paints
DE102011117182A1 (en) 2011-10-28 2013-05-02 Ruhrpumpen Gmbh Partial flow guide, in particular a magnetic coupling pump
US8883862B2 (en) 2012-01-12 2014-11-11 Kaohsiung Medical University Method for controlled release of parathyroid hormone from cross-linked hyaluronic acid hydrogel
AU2013254756B2 (en) 2012-04-25 2017-03-30 Ascendis Pharma A/S Prodrugs of hydroxyl-comprising drugs
US9457096B2 (en) * 2012-07-06 2016-10-04 Consejo Nacional De Investigaciones Cientificas Y Tecnicas (Concet) Protozoan variant-specific surface proteins (VSP) as carriers for oral drug delivery
WO2014033540A2 (en) 2012-08-28 2014-03-06 The Governors Of The University Of Alberta Parathyroid hormone, insulin, and related peptides conjugated to bone targeting moieties and methods of making and using thereof
AU2013328785B2 (en) 2012-10-11 2016-07-21 Ascendis Pharma A/S Hydrogel prodrugs
EP2906245B1 (en) 2012-10-11 2021-01-13 Ascendis Pharma A/S Diagnosis, prevention and treatment of diseases of the joint
JP2015533132A (en) * 2012-10-11 2015-11-19 アセンディス ファーマ オフサルモロジー ディヴィジョン エー／エス VEGF neutralizing prodrug for the treatment of ocular conditions
WO2014060512A1 (en) 2012-10-17 2014-04-24 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Fatty acid acylated amino acids for growth hormone delivery
AU2013353985B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2017-07-13 Ascendis Pharma A/S Carrier-linked prostanoid prodrugs
GB201303771D0 (en) * 2013-03-04 2013-04-17 Midatech Ltd Nanoparticles peptide compositions
EP2988783A1 (en) 2013-04-22 2016-03-02 Ascendis Pharma A/S Hydrogel-linked prodrugs releasing modified drugs
US20150065423A1 (en) * 2013-08-30 2015-03-05 Perosphere, Inc. Rapid acting injectable formulations
AU2014333954C1 (en) * 2013-10-08 2020-08-27 Ascendis Pharma A/S Protecting group comprising a purification tag
EP2868326A1 (en) * 2013-11-04 2015-05-06 Université Pierre et Marie Curie (Paris 6) Peptide inhibitors of TEAD/YAP-TAZ interaction
WO2016020373A1 (en) 2014-08-06 2016-02-11 Ascendis Pharma A/S Prodrugs comprising an aminoalkyl glycine linker
CA2964463C (en) 2014-10-22 2024-02-13 Extend Biosciences, Inc. Therapeutic vitamin d conjugates
EP3242689A1 (en) * 2015-01-09 2017-11-15 Ascendis Pharma Growth Disorders A/S Cnp prodrugs
AR105319A1 (en) * 2015-06-05 2017-09-27 Sanofi Sa PROPHARMS THAT INCLUDE A DUAL AGONIST GLU-1 / GLUCAGON CONJUGATE HIALURONIC ACID CONNECTOR
RU2747316C2 (en) 2016-03-01 2021-05-04 Асцендис Фарма Боун Дизизис А/С Rtn prodrugs
BR112019005793A2 (en) 2016-09-29 2019-06-18 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases As pth compounds with low peak-to-valley ratios
CA3037444A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2018-04-05 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases A/S Incremental dose finding in controlled-release pth compounds
RS64203B1 (en) 2016-09-29 2023-06-30 Ascendis Pharma Growth Disorders As Combination therapy with controlled-release cnp agonists
HUE063235T2 (en) 2016-09-29 2024-01-28 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases As Dosage regimen for a controlled-release pth compound
AR110299A1 (en) 2016-12-02 2019-03-13 Sanofi Sa CONJUGATES UNDERSTANDING A DUAL GLP-1 / GLUCAGON AGONIST, A CONNECTOR AND Hyaluronic Acid
AU2019270464A1 (en) 2018-05-18 2020-11-19 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases A/S Starting dose of PTH conjugates
CA3129357A1 (en) 2019-02-11 2020-08-20 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases A/S Liquid pharmaceutical formulations of pth conjugates
MX2022007371A (en) 2020-01-13 2022-07-12 Ascendis Pharma Bone Diseases As Hypoparathyroidism treatment.

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
DK3518960T3 (en) 2023-09-04
US11590207B2 (en) 2023-02-28
KR20190062496A (en) 2019-06-05
US11890326B2 (en) 2024-02-06
SG11201901576QA (en) 2019-03-28
EP4275677A3 (en) 2024-01-10
ES2959995T3 (en) 2024-02-29
IL265591A (en) 2019-05-30
KR20240013849A (en) 2024-01-30
US20230381284A1 (en) 2023-11-30
HUE063235T2 (en) 2024-01-28
CA3037442A1 (en) 2018-04-05
FI3518960T3 (en) 2023-10-04
CN117838873A (en) 2024-04-09
IL304086A (en) 2023-08-01
CN109789189A (en) 2019-05-21
MX2019003181A (en) 2019-08-05
JP7197468B2 (en) 2022-12-27
NZ751969A (en) 2023-04-28
ZA201901811B (en) 2019-12-18
US20200023041A1 (en) 2020-01-23
EP4275677A2 (en) 2023-11-15
EP3518960B1 (en) 2023-07-19
BR112019005533A2 (en) 2019-06-18
AU2017336249A1 (en) 2019-03-21
SI3518960T1 (en) 2023-11-30
WO2018060310A1 (en) 2018-04-05
JP2024041859A (en) 2024-03-27
EP3518960A1 (en) 2019-08-07
JP2019535648A (en) 2019-12-12
RS64440B1 (en) 2023-09-29
HRP20231079T1 (en) 2023-12-22
PL3518960T3 (en) 2023-12-27
US20230248836A1 (en) 2023-08-10
IL265591B2 (en) 2023-12-01
US11918628B2 (en) 2024-03-05
RU2019112913A3 (en) 2021-01-18
CN109789189B (en) 2024-01-23
LT3518960T (en) 2023-09-11
IL265591B1 (en) 2023-08-01
JP7418527B2 (en) 2024-01-19
RU2019112913A (en) 2020-10-30
JP2023017796A (en) 2023-02-07
KR102627405B1 (en) 2024-01-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11918628B2 (en) Controlled-release PTH compound
US11793861B2 (en) PTH prodrugs
US11857603B2 (en) PTH compounds with low peak-to-trough ratios
AU2017336250B2 (en) Incremental dose finding in controlled-release PTH compounds
RU2777357C2 (en) Dosage mode of pth compound of controlled release
US20240123038A1 (en) PTH Prodrugs

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED